Category: Trade

  • MIL-OSI: Magnite Unveils Next Generation of SpringServe, Combining Its Streaming Ad Server and SSP

    Source: GlobeNewswire (MIL-OSI)

    NEW YORK, April 23, 2025 (GLOBE NEWSWIRE) — Magnite (NASDAQ: MGNI), the largest independent sell-side advertising company, today unveiled the next generation of its SpringServe video platform, a CTV/OTT solution combining its award-winning SpringServe ad server with the advanced programmatic capabilities of the Magnite Streaming SSP. Initial clients to include Disney Advertising, LG Ad Solutions, Paramount, Roku, Samsung, and Warner Bros. Discovery.

    Developed for the needs of the world’s most advanced streaming clients, the unified platform streamlines buyers’ connection to 99% of US streaming supply, a dollar-weighted figure verified by Jounce Media in their March 2025 Supply Path Benchmarking Report. For media owners, the platform will unlock powerful tools for streamlined workflows and smarter yield optimization.

    “As the CTV space matures, there’s a significant opportunity to enhance the advertising process for media owners and buyers,” said Sean Buckley, President, Revenue at Magnite. “We’re building this next generation of SpringServe specifically to help our clients and partners stay ahead of these emerging opportunities. By unifying the programmatic layer as a complementary step in the buying process, not only does it give buyers greater transparency, predictability, and control over their ad placements, but it lays the foundation for more effective monetization and yield management for media owners.”

    “Disney continues to expand our global streaming footprint in collaboration with Magnite—unlocking more premium inventory and making it even easier for advertisers to access our portfolio at scale,” said Jamie Power, SVP, Addressable Sales at Disney. “Together, we’re advancing a shared vision for innovation—one that prioritizes automation, flexibility, and smarter tools to help our partners drive meaningful impact in the live streaming space.”

    “Controlling demand sources and optimizing ad placements in real time is essential to our strategy,” said Kelly McMahon, SVP of Operations at LG Ad Solutions. “SpringServe gives us the power to orchestrate everything in one platform—balancing programmatic demand and direct deals more effectively, without compromising the viewer experience.”

    “Working with valuable partners like Magnite has enabled Paramount to further optimize our programmatic demand sources, driving greater efficiency and performance while preserving a seamless viewing experience for our audiences,” said Christopher Owen, SVP, Partnerships at Paramount. “Continued advancements in programmatic play a meaningful role in our ongoing success both as a company and as part of the broader industry.”

    “Together with Magnite, we can create more opportunities for advertisers that offer platform transparency and flexibility across monetization, demand access, and user experience optimization,” said Jay Askinasi, SVP of Global Media Revenue and Growth at Roku. “SpringServe connects us more directly with DSPs, streamlining operations and augmenting revenue potential. This is an approach we believe will help attract greater advertising investment into the CTV ecosystem.”

    “Our long-standing partnership with Magnite has been instrumental in shaping our video monetization strategy, and we’re excited to partner with Magnite as they advance the SpringServe video platform,” said Jill Steinhauser, SVP Revenue Strategy and Operations, Warner Bros. Discovery. “We’re particularly looking forward to benefiting from the performance enhancements that enable faster ad loads and real-time pacing.”

    “Magnite helps fuel the premium, open internet,” said Will Doherty, SVP of Inventory Development, The Trade Desk. “Combined with tools like OpenPath, the next generation of SpringServe is accretive to advertisers and publishers and most importantly – so consumers can continue to enjoy the content we all love like CTV, journalism and more.”

    “Magnite’s unified SpringServe platform offers significant clarity and cohesion in the streaming TV marketplace,” said Susan Schiekofer, Chief Media Officer, GroupM US. “By providing deeper insight into the supply path and stronger alignment with premium inventory at scale, it empowers us to make smarter, faster buying decisions and ultimately deliver better outcomes for our clients.”

    “At OMG, we believe it’s a core right for advertisers to control and know where their ads deliver,” said Ryan Eusanio, SVP of Video and Programmatic at Omnicom Media Group. “Magnite’s SpringServe video platform helps us give our clients more control of their premium video strategy and enables better curation and targeting for campaigns.”

    The SpringServe video platform provides CTV and OTT publishers with improved functionality including:

    • Intelligent ad decisioning and dynamic mediation.
    • Automated ad routing that dynamically directs ad traffic to the highest-performing channels to ensure efficient ad delivery.
    • Centralized deal management to facilitate better visibility across direct and programmatic demand, including ClearLine deals.
    • Integration of Magnite Access for easy access to first- and third-party data.
    • A streamlined user interface and reporting for ad operations.

    For more information about the new SpringServe video platform, please visit magnite.com.

    About Magnite
    We’re Magnite (NASDAQ: MGNI), the world’s largest independent sell-side advertising company. Publishers use our technology to monetize their content across all screens and formats including CTV, online video, display, and audio. The world’s leading agencies and brands trust our platform to access brand-safe, high-quality ad inventory and execute billions of advertising transactions each month. Anchored in bustling New York City, sunny Los Angeles, mile high Denver, historic London, colorful Singapore, and down under in Sydney, Magnite has offices across North America, EMEA, LATAM, and APAC.

    The MIL Network

  • MIL-OSI: YieldMax™ ETFs Announces Distributions on PLTY (101.54%), MARO (101.13%), ULTY (77.02%), MRNY (63.58%), NVDY (63.07%), and Others

    Source: GlobeNewswire (MIL-OSI)

    CHICAGO, MILWAUKEE and NEW YORK, April 23, 2025 (GLOBE NEWSWIRE) — YieldMax™ today announced distributions for the YieldMax™ Weekly Payers and Group B ETFs listed in the table below.

    ETF Ticker1 ETF Name Distribution Frequency Distribution per Share Distribution Rate2,4 30-Day
    SEC Yield3
    ROC5 Ex-Date & Record Date Payment Date
    CHPY YieldMax™ Semiconductor Portfolio Option Income ETF Weekly $0.3454 0.23% 4/24/25 4/25/25
    GPTY YieldMax™ AI & Tech Portfolio Option Income ETF Weekly $0.2472 35.07% 0.00% 3.72% 4/24/25 4/25/25
    LFGY YieldMax™ Crypto Industry & Tech Portfolio Option Income ETF Weekly $0.4088 58.94% 0.00% 100.00% 4/24/25 4/25/25
    QDTY YieldMax™ Nasdaq 100 0DTE Covered Call ETF Weekly $0.3231 44.04% 0.00% 0.37% 4/24/25 4/25/25
    RDTY YieldMax™ R2000 0DTE Covered Call ETF Weekly $0.4570 56.72% 0.00% 100.00% 4/24/25 4/25/25
    SDTY YieldMax™ S&P 500 0DTE Covered Call ETF Weekly $0.3024 38.99% 0.00% 0.00% 4/24/25 4/25/25
    ULTY YieldMax™ Ultra Option Income Strategy ETF Weekly $0.0836 77.02% 2.21% 96.26% 4/24/25 4/25/25
    YMAG YieldMax™ Magnificent 7 Fund of Option Income ETFs Weekly $0.0924 34.84% 69.89% 87.58% 4/24/25 4/25/25
    YMAX YieldMax™ Universe Fund
    of Option Income ETFs
    Weekly $0.1367 56.19% 96.57% 74.88% 4/24/25 4/25/25
    BABO YieldMax™ BABA Option Income Strategy ETF Every 4 Weeks $0.6587 50.19% 1.92% 91.80% 4/24/25 4/25/25
    DIPS YieldMax™ Short NVDA Option Income Strategy ETF Every 4 Weeks $0.6186 62.68% 2.36% 0.00% 4/24/25 4/25/25
    FBY YieldMax™ META Option Income Strategy ETF Every 4 Weeks $0.5216 48.14% 4.38% 91.40% 4/24/25 4/25/25
    GDXY YieldMax™ Gold Miners Option Income Strategy ETF Every 4 Weeks $0.7284 56.99% 2.77% 0.00% 4/24/25 4/25/25
    JPMO YieldMax™ JPM Option Income Strategy ETF Every 4 Weeks $0.5612 46.44% 4.01% 92.60% 4/24/25 4/25/25
    MARO YieldMax™ MARA Option Income Strategy ETF Every 4 Weeks $1.8468 101.13% 4.90% 97.16% 4/24/25 4/25/25
    MRNY YieldMax™ MRNA Option Income Strategy ETF Every 4 Weeks $0.1261 63.58% 4.65% 0.00% 4/24/25 4/25/25
    NVDY YieldMax™ NVDA Option Income Strategy ETF Every 4 Weeks $0.6734 63.07% 4.01% 85.30% 4/24/25 4/25/25
    PLTY YieldMax™ PLTR Option Income Strategy ETF Every 4 Weeks $4.6556 101.54% 2.78% 98.08% 4/24/25 4/25/25
    Weekly Payers & Group C ETFs scheduled for next week: CHPY GPTY LFGY QDTY RDTY SDTY ULTY YMAG YMAX ABNY AMDY CONY CVNY FIAT MSFO NFLY PYPY

    Performance data quoted represents past performance and is no guarantee of future results. Investment return and principal value of an investment will fluctuate so that an investor’s shares, when sold or redeemed, may be worth more or less than their original cost and current performance may be lower or higher than the performance quoted above. Performance current to the most recent month-end can be obtained by calling (833) 378-0717.

    Note: DIPS, FIAT, CRSH, YQQQ and WNTR are hereinafter referred to as the “Short ETFs.”

    Distributions are not guaranteed. The Distribution Rate and 30-Day SEC Yield are not indicative of future distributions, if any, on the ETFs. In particular, future distributions on any ETF may differ significantly from its Distribution Rate or 30-Day SEC Yield. You are not guaranteed a distribution under the ETFs. Distributions for the ETFs (if any) are variable and may vary significantly from period to period and may be zero. Accordingly, the Distribution Rate and 30-Day SEC Yield will change over time, and such change may be significant.

    Investors in the Funds will not have rights to receive dividends or other distributions with respect to the underlying reference asset(s).

    1  All YieldMax™ ETFs shown in the table above (except YMAX, YMAG, FEAT, FIVY and ULTY) have a gross expense ratio of 0.99%. YMAX, YMAG and FEAT have a Management Fee of 0.29% and Acquired Fund Fees and Expenses of 0.99% for a gross expense ratio of 1.28%. FIVY has a Management Fee of 0.29% and Acquired Fund Fees and Expenses of 0.59% for a gross expense ratio of 0.88%. “Acquired Fund Fees and Expenses” are indirect fees and expenses that the Fund incurs from investing in the shares of other investment companies, namely other YieldMax™ ETFs. ULTY has a gross expense ratio after the fee waiver of 1.30%. The Advisor has agreed to a fee waiver of 0.10% through at least February 28, 2026.

    2  The Distribution Rate shown is as of close on April 22, 2025. The Distribution Rate is the annual distribution rate an investor would receive if the most recent distribution, which includes option income, remained the same going forward. The Distribution Rate is calculated by annualizing an ETF’s Distribution per Share and dividing such annualized amount by the ETF’s most recent NAV. The Distribution Rate represents a single distribution from the ETF and does not represent its total return. Distributions may also include a combination of ordinary dividends, capital gain, and return of investor capital, which may decrease an ETF’s NAV and trading price over time. As a result, an investor may suffer significant losses to their investment. These Distribution Rates may be caused by unusually favorable market conditions and may not be sustainable. Such conditions may not continue to exist and there should be no expectation that this performance may be repeated in the future.

    3  The 30-Day SEC Yield represents net investment income, which excludes option income, earned by such ETF over the 30-Day period ended March 31, 2025, expressed as an annual percentage rate based on such ETF’s share price at the end of the 30-Day period.

    4  Each ETF’s strategy (except those of the Short ETFs) will cap potential gains if its reference asset’s shares increase in value, yet subjects an investor to all potential losses if the reference asset’s shares decrease in value. Such potential losses may not be offset by income received by the ETF. Each Short ETF’s strategy will cap potential gains if its reference asset decreases in value, yet subjects an investor to all potential losses if the reference asset increases in value. Such potential losses may not be offset by income received by the ETF.

    5  ROC refers to Return of Capital. The ROC percentage is the portion of the distribution that represents an investor’s original investment.

    Each Fund has a limited operating history and while each Fund’s objective is to provide current income, there is no guarantee the Fund will make a distribution. Distributions are likely to vary greatly in amount.

    Standardized Performance

    For YMAX, click here. For YMAG, click here. For TSLY, click here. For OARK, click here. For APLY, click here. For NVDY, click here. For AMZY, click here. For FBY, click here. For GOOY, click here. For NFLY, click here. For CONY, click here. For MSFO, click here. For DISO, click here. For XOMO, click here. For JPMO, click here. For AMDY, click here. For PYPY, click here. For XYZY, click here. For MRNY, click here. For AIYY, click here. For MSTY, click here. For ULTY, click here. For YBIT, click here. For CRSH, click here. For GDXY, click here. For SNOY, click here. For ABNY, click here. For FIAT, click here. For DIPS, click here. For BABO, click here. For YQQQ, click here. For TSMY, click here. For SMCY, click here. For PLTY, click here. For BIGY, click here. For SOXY, click here. For MARO, click here. For FEAT, click here. For FIVY, click here. For LFGY, click here. For GPTY, click here. For CVNY, click here. For SDTY, click here. For QDTY, click here. For WNTR, click here. For CHPY, click here. For RNTY, click here.

    Important Information

    This material must be preceded or accompanied by the prospectus. For all prospectuses, click here.

    Tidal Financial Group is the adviser for all YieldMax™ ETFs.

    THE FUND, TRUST, AND ADVISER ARE NOT AFFILIATED WITH ANY UNDERLYING REFERENCE ASSET.

    Risk Disclosures (applicable to all YieldMax ETFs referenced above, except the Short ETFs)

    YMAX, YMAG, FEAT and FIVY generally invest in other YieldMax™ ETFs. As such, these two Funds are subject to the risks listed in this section, which apply to all the YieldMax™ ETFs they may hold from time to time.

    Investing involves risk. Principal loss is possible.

    Referenced Index Risk. The Fund invests in options contracts that are based on the value of the Index (or the Index ETFs). This subjects the Fund to certain of the same risks as if it owned shares of companies that comprised the Index or an ETF that tracks the Index, even though it does not.

    Indirect Investment Risk. The Index is not affiliated with the Trust, the Fund, the Adviser, or their respective affiliates and is not involved with this offering in any way. Investors in the Fund will not have the right to receive dividends or other distributions or any other rights with respect to the companies that comprise the Index but will be subject to declines in the performance of the Index.

    Russell 2000 Index Risks. The Index, which consists of small-cap U.S. companies, is particularly susceptible to economic changes, as these firms often have less financial resilience than larger companies. Market volatility can disproportionately affect these smaller businesses, leading to significant price swings. Additionally, these companies are often more exposed to specific industry risks and have less diverse revenue streams. They can also be more vulnerable to changes in domestic regulatory or policy environments.

    Call Writing Strategy Risk. The path dependency (i.e., the continued use) of the Fund’s call writing strategy will impact the extent that the Fund participates in the positive price returns of the underlying reference asset and, in turn, the Fund’s returns, both during the term of the sold call options and over longer periods.

    Counterparty Risk. The Fund is subject to counterparty risk by virtue of its investments in options contracts. Transactions in some types of derivatives, including options, are required to be centrally cleared (“cleared derivatives”). In a transaction involving cleared derivatives, the Fund’s counterparty is a clearing house rather than a bank or broker. Since the Fund is not a member of clearing houses and only members of a clearing house (“clearing members”) can participate directly in the clearing house, the Fund will hold cleared derivatives through accounts at clearing members.

    Derivatives Risk. Derivatives are financial instruments that derive value from the underlying reference asset or assets, such as stocks, bonds, or funds (including ETFs), interest rates or indexes. The Fund’s investments in derivatives may pose risks in addition to, and greater than, those associated with directly investing in securities or other ordinary investments, including risk related to the market, imperfect correlation with underlying investments or the Fund’s other portfolio holdings, higher price volatility, lack of availability, counterparty risk, liquidity, valuation and legal restrictions.

    Options Contracts. The use of options contracts involves investment strategies and risks different from those associated with ordinary portfolio securities transactions. The prices of options are volatile and are influenced by, among other things, actual and anticipated changes in the value of the underlying instrument, including the anticipated volatility, which are affected by fiscal and monetary policies and by national and international political, changes in the actual or implied volatility or the reference asset, the time remaining until the expiration of the option contract and economic events.

    Distribution Risk. As part of the Fund’s investment objective, the Fund seeks to provide current income. There is no assurance that the Fund will make a distribution in any given period. If the Fund does make distributions, the amounts of such distributions will likely vary greatly from one distribution to the next.

    High Portfolio Turnover Risk. The Fund may actively and frequently trade all or a significant portion of the Fund’s holdings. A high portfolio turnover rate increases transaction costs, which may increase the Fund’s expenses.

    Liquidity Risk. Some securities held by the Fund, including options contracts, may be difficult to sell or be illiquid, particularly during times of market turmoil.

    Non-Diversification Risk. Because the Fund is “non-diversified,” it may invest a greater percentage of its assets in the securities of a single issuer or a smaller number of issuers than if it was a diversified fund.

    New Fund Risk. The Fund is a recently organized management investment company with no operating history. As a result, prospective investors do not have a track record or history on which to base their investment decisions.

    Price Participation Risk. The Fund employs an investment strategy that includes the sale of call option contracts, which limits the degree to which the Fund will participate in increases in value experienced by the underlying reference asset over the Call Period.

    Single Issuer Risk. Issuer-specific attributes may cause an investment in the Fund to be more volatile than a traditional pooled investment which diversifies risk or the market generally. The value of the Fund, which focuses on an individual security (ARKK, TSLA, AAPL, NVDA, AMZN, META, GOOGL, NFLX, COIN, MSFT, DIS, XOM, JPM, AMD, PYPL, SQ, MRNA, AI, MSTR, Bitcoin ETP, GDX®, SNOW, ABNB, BABA, TSM, SMCI, PLTR, MARA, CVNA), may be more volatile than a traditional pooled investment or the market as a whole and may perform differently from the value of a traditional pooled investment or the market as a whole.

    Inflation Risk. Inflation risk is the risk that the value of assets or income from investments will be less in the future as inflation decreases the value of money. As inflation increases, the present value of the Fund’s assets and distributions, if any, may decline.

    Indirect Investment Risk. The Index is not affiliated with the Trust, the Fund, the Adviser, or their respective affiliates and is not involved with this offering in any way.

    Risk Disclosures (applicable only to GPTY)

    Artificial Intelligence Risk. Issuers engaged in artificial intelligence typically have high research and capital expenditures and, as a result, their profitability can vary widely, if they are profitable at all. The space in which they are engaged is highly competitive and issuers’ products and services may become obsolete very quickly. These companies are heavily dependent on intellectual property rights and may be adversely affected by loss or impairment of those rights. The issuers are also subject to legal, regulatory, and political changes that may have a large impact on their profitability. A failure in an issuer’s product or even questions about the safety of the product could be devastating to the issuer, especially if it is the marquee product of the issuer. It can be difficult to accurately capture what qualifies as an artificial intelligence company.

    Technology Sector Risk. The Fund will invest substantially in companies in the information technology sector, and therefore the performance of the Fund could be negatively impacted by events affecting this sector. Market or economic factors impacting technology companies and companies that rely heavily on technological advances could have a significant effect on the value of the Fund’s investments. The value of stocks of information technology companies and companies that rely heavily on technology is particularly vulnerable to rapid changes in technology product cycles, rapid product obsolescence, government regulation and competition, both domestically and internationally, including competition from foreign competitors with lower production costs. Stocks of information technology companies and companies that rely heavily on technology, especially those of smaller, less-seasoned companies, tend to be more volatile than the overall market. Information technology companies are heavily dependent on patent and intellectual property rights, the loss or impairment of which may adversely affect profitability.

    Risk Disclosure (applicable only to MARO)

    Digital Assets Risk: The Fund does not invest directly in Bitcoin or any other digital assets. The Fund does not invest directly in derivatives that track the performance of Bitcoin or any other digital assets. The Fund does not invest in or seek direct exposure to the current “spot” or cash price of Bitcoin. Investors seeking direct exposure to the price of Bitcoin should consider an investment other than the Fund. Digital assets like Bitcoin, designed as mediums of exchange, are still an emerging asset class. They operate independently of any central authority or government backing and are subject to regulatory changes and extreme price volatility.

    Risk Disclosures (applicable only to BABO and TSMY)

    Currency Risk: Indirect exposure to foreign currencies subjects the Fund to the risk that currencies will decline in value relative to the U.S. dollar. Currency rates in foreign countries may fluctuate significantly over short periods of time for a number of reasons, including changes in interest rates and the imposition of currency controls or other political developments in the U.S. or abroad.

    Depositary Receipts Risk: The securities underlying BABO and TSMY are American Depositary Receipts (“ADRs”). Investment in ADRs may be less liquid than the underlying shares in their primary trading market.

    Foreign Market and Trading Risk: The trading markets for many foreign securities are not as active as U.S. markets and may have less governmental regulation and oversight.

    Foreign Securities Risk: Investments in securities of non-U.S. issuers involve certain risks that may not be present with investments in securities of U.S. issuers, such as risk of loss due to foreign currency fluctuations or to political or economic instability, as well as varying regulatory requirements applicable to investments in non-U.S. issuers. There may be less information publicly available about a non-U.S. issuer than a U.S. issuer. Non-U.S. issuers may also be subject to different regulatory, accounting, auditing, financial reporting, and investor protection standards than U.S. issuers.

    Risk Disclosures (applicable only to GDXY)

    Risk of Investing in Foreign Securities. The Fund is exposed indirectly to the securities of foreign issuers selected by GDX®’s investment adviser, which subjects the Fund to the risks associated with such companies. Investments in the securities of foreign issuers involve risks beyond those associated with investments in U.S. securities.

    Risk of Investing in Gold and Silver Mining Companies. The Fund is exposed indirectly to gold and silver mining companies selected by GDX®’s investment adviser, which subjects the Fund to the risks associated with such companies.

    The Fund invests in options contracts based on the value of the VanEck Gold Miners ETF (GDX®), which subjects the Fund to some of the same risks as if it owned GDX®, as well as the risks associated with Canadian, Australian and Emerging Market Issuers, and Small-and Medium-Capitalization companies.

    Risk Disclosures (applicable only to YBIT)

    YBIT does not invest directly in Bitcoin or any other digital assets. YBIT does not invest directly in derivatives that track the performance of Bitcoin or any other digital assets. YBIT does not invest in or seek direct exposure to the current “spot” or cash price of Bitcoin. Investors seeking direct exposure to the price of Bitcoin should consider an investment other than YBIT.

    Bitcoin Investment Risk: The Fund’s indirect investment in Bitcoin, through holdings in one or more Underlying ETPs, exposes it to the unique risks of this emerging innovation. Bitcoin’s price is highly volatile, and its market is influenced by the changing Bitcoin network, fluctuating acceptance levels, and unpredictable usage trends.

    Digital Assets Risk: Digital assets like Bitcoin, designed as mediums of exchange, are still an emerging asset class. They operate independently of any central authority or government backing and are subject to regulatory changes and extreme price volatility. Potentially No 1940 Act Protections. As of the date of this Prospectus, there is only a single eligible Underlying ETP, and it is an investment company subject to the 1940 Act.

    Bitcoin ETP Risk: The Fund invests in options contracts that are based on the value of the Bitcoin ETP. This subjects the Fund to certain of the same risks as if it owned shares of the Bitcoin ETP, even though it does not. Bitcoin ETPs are subject, but not limited, to significant risk and heightened volatility. An investor in a Bitcoin ETP may lose their entire investment. Bitcoin ETPs are not suitable for all investors. In addition, not all Bitcoin ETPs are registered under the Investment Company Act of 1940. Those Bitcoin ETPs that are not registered under such statute are therefore not subject to the same regulations as exchange traded products that are so registered.

    Risk Disclosures (applicable only to the Short ETFs)

    Investing involves risk. Principal loss is possible.

    Price Appreciation Risk. As part of the Fund’s synthetic covered put strategy, the Fund purchases and sells call and put option contracts that are based on the value of the underlying reference asset. This strategy subjects the Fund to certain of the same risks as if it shorted the underlying reference asset, even though it does not. By virtue of the Fund’s indirect inverse exposure to changes in the value of the underlying reference asset, the Fund is subject to the risk that the value of the underlying reference asset increases. If the value of the underlying reference asset increases, the Fund will likely lose value and, as a result, the Fund may suffer significant losses.

    Put Writing Strategy Risk. The path dependency (i.e., the continued use) of the Fund’s put writing (selling) strategy will impact the extent that the Fund participates in decreases in the value of the underlying reference asset and, in turn, the Fund’s returns, both during the term of the sold put options and over longer periods.

    Purchased OTM Call Options Risk. The Fund’s strategy is subject to potential losses if the underlying reference asset increases in value, which may not be offset by the purchase of out-of-the-money (OTM) call options. The Fund purchases OTM calls to seek to manage (cap) the Fund’s potential losses from the Fund’s short exposure to the underlying reference asset if it appreciates significantly in value. However, the OTM call options will cap the Fund’s losses only to the extent that the value of the underlying reference asset increases to a level that is at or above the strike level of the purchased OTM call options. Any increase in the value of the underlying reference asset to a level that is below the strike level of the purchased OTM call options will result in a corresponding loss for the Fund. For example, if the OTM call options have a strike level that is approximately 100% above the then-current value of the underlying reference asset at the time of the call option purchase, and the value of the underlying reference asset increases by at least 100% during the term of the purchased OTM call options, the Fund will lose all its value. Since the Fund bears the costs of purchasing the OTM calls, such costs will decrease the Fund’s value and/or any income otherwise generated by the Fund’s investment strategy.

    Counterparty Risk. The Fund is subject to counterparty risk by virtue of its investments in options contracts. Transactions in some types of derivatives, including options, are required to be centrally cleared (“cleared derivatives”). In a transaction involving cleared derivatives, the Fund’s counterparty is a clearing house rather than a bank or broker. Since the Fund is not a member of clearing houses and only members of a clearing house (“clearing members”) can participate directly in the clearing house, the Fund will hold cleared derivatives through accounts at clearing members.

    Derivatives Risk. Derivatives are financial instruments that derive value from the underlying reference asset or assets, such as stocks, bonds, or funds (including ETFs), interest rates or indexes. The Fund’s investments in derivatives may pose risks in addition to, and greater than, those associated with directly investing in securities or other ordinary investments, including risk related to the market, imperfect correlation with underlying investments or the Fund’s other portfolio holdings, higher price volatility, lack of availability, counterparty risk, liquidity, valuation and legal restrictions.

    Options Contracts. The use of options contracts involves investment strategies and risks different from those associated with ordinary portfolio securities transactions. The prices of options are volatile and are influenced by, among other things, actual and anticipated changes in the value of the underlying reference asset, including the anticipated volatility, which are affected by fiscal and monetary policies and by national and international political, changes in the actual or implied volatility or the reference asset, the time remaining until the expiration of the option contract and economic events.

    Distribution Risk. As part of the Fund’s investment objective, the Fund seeks to provide current income. There is no assurance that the Fund will make a distribution in any given period. If the Fund does make distributions, the amounts of such distributions will likely vary greatly from one distribution to the next.

    High Portfolio Turnover Risk. The Fund may actively and frequently trade all or a significant portion of the Fund’s holdings.

    Liquidity Risk. Some securities held by the Fund, including options contracts, may be difficult to sell or be illiquid, particularly during times of market turmoil.

    Non-Diversification Risk. Because the Fund is “non-diversified,” it may invest a greater percentage of its assets in the securities of a single issuer or a smaller number of issuers than if it was a diversified fund.

    New Fund Risk. The Fund is a recently organized management investment company with no operating history. As a result, prospective investors do not have a track record or history on which to base their investment decisions.

    Price Participation Risk. The Fund employs an investment strategy that includes the sale of put option contracts, which limits the degree to which the Fund will participate in decreases in value experienced by the underlying reference asset over the Put Period.

    Single Issuer Risk. Issuer-specific attributes may cause an investment in the Fund to be more volatile than a traditional pooled investment which diversifies risk or the market generally. The value of the Fund, for any Fund that focuses on an individual security (e.g., TSLA, COIN, NVDA, MSTR), may be more volatile than a traditional pooled investment or the market as a whole and may perform differently from the value of a traditional pooled investment or the market as a whole.

    Inflation Risk. Inflation risk is the risk that the value of assets or income from investments will be less in the future as inflation decreases the value of money. As inflation increases, the present value of the Fund’s assets and distributions, if any, may decline.

    Risk Disclosures (applicable only to CHPY)

    Semiconductor Industry Risk. Semiconductor companies may face intense competition, both domestically and internationally, and such competition may have an adverse effect on their profit margins. Semiconductor companies may have limited product lines, markets, financial resources or personnel. Semiconductor companies’ supply chain and operations are dependent on the availability of materials that meet exacting standards and the use of third parties to provide components and services.

    The products of semiconductor companies may face obsolescence due to rapid technological developments and frequent new product introduction, unpredictable changes in growth rates and competition for the services of qualified personnel. Capital equipment expenditures could be substantial, and equipment generally suffers from rapid obsolescence. Companies in the semiconductor industry are heavily dependent on patent and intellectual property rights. The loss or impairment of these rights would adversely affect the profitability of these companies.

    Risk Disclosures (applicable only to YQQQ)

    Index Overview. The Nasdaq 100 Index is a benchmark index that includes 100 of the largest non-financial companies listed on the Nasdaq Stock Market, based on market capitalization.

    Index Level Appreciation Risk. As part of the Fund’s synthetic covered put strategy, the Fund purchases and sells call and put option contracts that are based on the Index level. This strategy subjects the Fund to certain of the same risks as if it shorted the Index, even though it does not. By virtue of the Fund’s indirect inverse exposure to changes in the Index level, the Fund is subject to the risk that the Index level increases. If the Index level increases, the Fund will likely lose value and, as a result, the Fund may suffer significant losses. The Fund may also be subject to the following risks: innovation and technological advancement; strong market presence of Index constituent companies; adaptability to global market trends; and resilience and recovery potential.

    Index Level Participation Risk. The Fund employs an investment strategy that includes the sale of put option contracts, which limits the degree to which the Fund will benefit from decreases in the Index level experienced over the Put Period. This means that if the Index level experiences a decrease in value below the strike level of the sold put options during a Put Period, the Fund will likely not experience that increase to the same extent and any Fund gains may significantly differ from the level of the Index losses over the Put Period. Additionally, because the Fund is limited in the degree to which it will participate in decreases in value experienced by the Index level over each Put Period, but has significant negative exposure to any increases in value experienced by the Index level over the Put Period, the NAV of the Fund may decrease over any given period. The Fund’s NAV is dependent on the value of each options portfolio, which is based principally upon the inverse of the performance of the Index level. The Fund’s ability to benefit from the Index level decreases will depend on prevailing market conditions, especially market volatility, at the time the Fund enters into the sold put option contracts and will vary from Put Period to Put Period. The value of the options contracts is affected by changes in the value and dividend rates of component companies that comprise the Index, changes in interest rates, changes in the actual or perceived volatility of the Index and the remaining time to the options’ expiration, as well as trading conditions in the options market. As the Index level changes and time moves towards the expiration of each Put Period, the value of the options contracts, and therefore the Fund’s NAV, will change. However, it is not expected for the Fund’s NAV to directly inversely correlate on a day-to-day basis with the returns of the Index level. The amount of time remaining until the options contract’s expiration date affects the impact that the value of the options contracts has on the Fund’s NAV, which may not be in full effect until the expiration date of the Fund’s options contracts. Therefore, while changes in the Index level will result in changes to the Fund’s NAV, the Fund generally anticipates that the rate of change in the Fund’s NAV will be different than the inverse of the changes experienced by the Index level.

    YieldMax™ ETFs are distributed by Foreside Fund Services, LLC. Foreside is not affiliated with Tidal Financial Group, or YieldMax™ ETFs.

    © 2025 YieldMax™ ETFs

    The MIL Network

  • MIL-OSI: OTC Markets Group Welcomes ONWARD Medical N.V. to OTCQX

    Source: GlobeNewswire (MIL-OSI)

    NEW YORK, April 23, 2025 (GLOBE NEWSWIRE) — OTC Markets Group Inc. (OTCQX: OTCM), operator of regulated markets for trading 12,000 U.S. and international securities, today announced ONWARD Medical N.V. (Euronext Brussels: ONWD; OTCQX: ONWRF, ONWRY), a medical technology company creating innovative spinal cord stimulation therapies to restore movement, function, and independence in people with spinal cord injury (SCI) and other movement disabilities now trades on the OTCQX market.

    ONWARD Medical N.V. begins trading today on OTCQX under the symbols “ONWRF and ONWRY.” US investors can find current financial disclosure and Real-Time Level 2 quotes for the company on www.otcmarkets.com.

    “We are pleased to expand access to US investors, many of whom have expressed interest in supporting ONWARD after learning about our mission to help people with spinal cord injury,” said Dave Marver, CEO of ONWARD Medical. “Trading on OTCQX provides greater visibility and the opportunity for improved liquidity. We have also established a sponsored Level 1 ADR program to facilitate ease of trading for qualified US financial institutions, with our ADRs also trading on OTCQX. Broader US investor participation is an important step in our journey to a potential US IPO.”

    “We are proud to announce the addition of ONWARD Medical to the OTCQX Market,” said Jason Paltrowitz, EVP of Corporate Services at OTC Markets. “This milestone not only marks a significant achievement for the company but also highlights the interplay between the European capital markets and U.S. investors seeking new investment opportunities.”

    Upgrading to the OTCQX Market is an important step for companies seeking to provide transparent trading for their U.S. investors. For companies listed on a qualified international exchange, streamlined market standards enable them to utilize their home market reporting to make their information available in the U.S. To qualify for OTCQX, companies must meet high financial standards, follow best practice corporate governance and demonstrate compliance with applicable securities laws.

    ONWARD has also established a Level 1 ADR program to facilitate trading by qualified financial institutions. BNY acts as the depositary bank and transfer agent for the Company’s ADR program, with one ADR representing one ordinary share. The Company’s ADRs can also be traded on OTCQX under the ticker symbol ONWRY.

    About OTC Markets Group Inc.

    OTC Markets Group Inc. (OTCQX: OTCM) operates regulated markets for trading 12,000 U.S. and international securities. Our data-driven disclosure standards form the foundation of our three public markets: OTCQX® Best Market, OTCQB® Venture Market and Pink® Open Market.

    Our OTC Link® Alternative Trading Systems (ATSs) provide critical market infrastructure that broker-dealers rely on to facilitate trading. Our innovative model offers companies more efficient access to the U.S. financial markets.

    OTC Link ATS, OTC Link ECN, OTC Link NQB, and MOON ATS™ are each an SEC regulated ATS, operated by OTC Link LLC, a FINRA and SEC registered broker-dealer, member SIPC.

    To learn more about how we create better informed and more efficient markets, visit www.otcmarkets.com.

    Subscribe to the OTC Markets RSS Feed

    About ONWARD Medical

    ONWARD Medical is a medical technology company creating therapies to restore movement, function, and independence in people with SCI and other movement disabilities. Building on more than a decade of scientific discovery, preclinical research, and clinical studies conducted at leading hospitals, rehabilitation clinics, and neuroscience laboratories, the Company has developed ARC Therapy, which has been awarded ten Breakthrough Device Designations from the US Food and Drug Administration (FDA). The Company’s ARC-EX System is now cleared for commercial sale in the US. In addition, the Company is developing an investigational implantable system called ARC-IM with and without an implanted brain-computer interface (BCI).

    Headquartered in the Netherlands, the Company has a Science and Engineering Center in Switzerland and a US office in Boston, Massachusetts. The Company is listed on Euronext Paris, Brussels, and Amsterdam (ticker: ONWD).

    For more information, visit ONWD.com and connect with us on LinkedIn and YouTube.

    To be kept informed about the Company’s technologies, research studies, and the availability of therapies in your area, please complete this webform.

    Media Contacts:

    For OTC Markets Group Inquiries:
    media@otcmarkets.com
    +1 (212) 896-4428

    For ONWARD Media Inquiries:  
    media@onwd.com 

    For ONWARD Investor Inquiries: 
    investors@onwd.com

    The MIL Network

  • MIL-OSI: Virtu Announces First Quarter 2025 Results

    Source: GlobeNewswire (MIL-OSI)

    NEW YORK, April 23, 2025 (GLOBE NEWSWIRE) — Virtu Financial, Inc. (NASDAQ: VIRT), a leading provider of financial services and products that leverages cutting edge technology to deliver innovative, transparent trading solutions to its clients and liquidity to the global markets, today reported results for the first quarter ended March 31, 2025.

    First Quarter 2025:

    • Net income of $189.6 million; Normalized Adjusted Net Income1 of $208.3 million
    • Basic and diluted earnings per share of $1.09 and $1.08, respectively; Normalized Adjusted EPS1 of $1.30
    • Total revenues of $837.9 million; Trading income, net, of $590.0 million; Net income Margin of 22.6%2
      • Adjusted Net Trading Income1 of $497.1 million
    • Adjusted EBITDA1 of $319.9 million; Adjusted EBITDA Margin1 of 64.4%
    • Share buybacks of $48.1 million, or 1.3 million shares, under the Share Repurchase Program3

    The Virtu Financial, Inc. Board of Directors declared a quarterly cash dividend of $0.24 per share. This dividend is payable on June 16, 2025 to shareholders of record as of May 30, 2025.

    Note 1: Non-GAAP financial measures. Please see “Non-GAAP Financial Measures and Other Items” for more information.
    Note 2: Calculated by dividing Net income by Total revenue
    Note 3: Shares repurchased calculated on a settlement date basis.

    Financial Results

    First Quarter 2025:

    Total revenues increased 30.3% to $837.9 million for this quarter, compared to $642.8 million for the same period in 2024. Trading income, net, increased 44.6% to $590.0 million for the quarter compared to $408.1 million for the same period in 2024. Net income totaled $189.6 million for this quarter, compared to net income of $111.3 million in the prior year quarter.

    Basic and diluted earnings per share for this quarter were $1.09 and $1.08, respectively, compared to basic and diluted earnings per share of $0.59 for the same period in 2024.

    Adjusted Net Trading Income increased 35.5% to $497.1 million for this quarter, compared to $366.9 million for the same period in 2024. Adjusted EBITDA increased 57.7% to $319.9 million for this quarter, compared to $202.8 million for the same period in 2024. Normalized Adjusted Net Income, removing one-time and non-cash items, increased 67.6% to $208.3 million for this quarter, compared to $124.3 million for the same period in 2024.

    Assuming all non-controlling interests had been exchanged for common stock, and the Company’s Normalized Adjusted Net Income before income taxes was subject to corporation taxes, Normalized Adjusted EPS was $1.30 for this quarter, compared to $0.76 for the same period in 2024.

    Operating Segment Information

    The Company has two operating segments: Market Making and Execution Services; and one non-operating segment: Corporate.

    Market Making principally consists of market making in the cash, futures and options markets across global equities, fixed income, currencies, cryptocurrencies, and commodities. As a market maker, the Company commits capital on a principal basis by offering to buy securities from, or sell securities to, broker dealers, banks and institutions.

    Execution Services comprises agency-based trading and trading venues, offering execution services in global equities, options, futures and fixed income on behalf of institutions, banks and broker dealers. The Company also provides proprietary technology and infrastructure, workflow technology, and trading analytics services to select third parties. The segment also includes the results of the Company’s capital markets business, in which the Company acts as an agent for issuers in connection with at-the-market offerings and buyback programs.

    Corporate contains the Company’s investments, principally in strategic trading-related opportunities, and maintains corporate overhead expenses.

    The following tables show the trading income, net, total revenues and Adjusted Net Trading Income by segment for the three months ended March 31, 2025 and 2024.

    Total revenues by segment
    (in thousands, unaudited)

        Three Months Ended March 31, 2025   Three Months Ended March 31, 2024
        Market Making   Execution Services   Corporate   Total   Market Making   Execution Services   Corporate   Total
    Trading income, net   $ 582,622     $ 7,361     $   $ 589,983     $ 403,698   $ 4,397     $   $ 408,095
    Commissions, net and technology services     17,312       133,995           151,307       7,202     111,409           118,611
    Interest and dividends income     106,438       2,615           109,053       103,802     2,190           105,992
    Other, net     (15,200 )     (2,963 )     5,689     (12,474 )     6,306     (208 )     4,043     10,141
    Total Revenues   $ 691,172     $ 141,008     $ 5,689   $ 837,869     $ 521,008   $ 117,788     $ 4,043   $ 642,839
                                     

    Reconciliation of trading income, net to Adjusted Net Trading Income by operating segment
    (in thousands, unaudited)

        Three Months Ended March 31, 2025   Three Months Ended March 31, 2024
        Market Making   Execution Services   Corporate   Total   Market Making   Execution Services   Corporate   Total
    Trading income, net   $ 582,622     $ 7,361     $   $ 589,983     $ 403,698     $ 4,397     $   $ 408,095  
    Commissions, net and technology services     17,312       133,995           151,307       7,202       111,409           118,611  
    Interest and dividends income     106,438       2,615           109,053       103,802       2,190           105,992  
    Brokerage, exchange, clearance fees and payments for order flow, net     (194,303 )     (27,572 )         (221,875 )     (115,866 )     (23,933 )         (139,799 )
    Interest and dividends expense     (130,051 )     (1,277 )         (131,328 )     (125,158 )     (870 )         (126,028 )
    Adjusted Net Trading Income   $ 382,018     $ 115,122     $   $ 497,140     $ 273,678     $ 93,193     $   $ 366,871  
                                     

    Financial Condition

    As of March 31, 2025, Virtu had $771.0 million in cash, cash equivalents and restricted cash, and total long-term debt outstanding in an aggregate principal amount of $1,768.3 million.

    Share Repurchase Program

    Since inception of the program in November 2020 through settlement date April 17, 2025, the Company repurchased approximately 52.1 million shares of Class A Common Stock and Virtu Financial Units for approximately $1,346.2 million. The Company has approximately $373.8 million remaining capacity for future purchases of shares of Class A Common Stock and Virtu Financial Units under the program.

    Earnings Conference Call Information

    Virtu Financial will host a conference call to review its first quarter 2025 financial performance today, April 23rd, at 8:00 a.m. ET. Members of the public may listen to the conference call through an audio webcast through the Investor Relations section of the firm’s website ir.virtu.com/investor-relations.

    Website Information

    We routinely post important information for investors on the Investor Relations section of our website, ir.virtu.com/investor-relations and also from time to time may use social media channels, including our X account (x.com/virtufinancial) and our LinkedIn account (linkedin.com/company/virtu-financial), as an additional means of disclosing public information to investors, the media and others interested in us. It is possible that certain information we post on our website and on social media could be deemed to be material information, and we encourage investors, the media and others interested in us to review the business and financial information we post on our website and on the social media channels identified above, in addition to following our press releases, SEC filings, public conference calls, presentations and webcasts. The information contained on, or that may be accessed through, our website and our social media channels is not incorporated by reference into, and is not a part of, this document.

    Non-GAAP Financial Measures and Other Items

    To supplement our unaudited condensed consolidated financial statements presented in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles (“GAAP”), we use the following non-GAAP measures of financial performance:

    • “Adjusted Net Trading Income”, which is the amount of revenue we generate from our market making activities, or trading income, net, plus commissions, net and technology services, plus interest and dividends income and expense, net, less direct costs associated with those revenues, including brokerage, exchange, clearance fees and payments for order flow, net. Management believes that this measurement is useful for comparing general operating performance from period to period. Although we use Adjusted Net Trading Income as a financial measure to assess the performance of our business, the use of Adjusted Net Trading Income is limited because it does not include certain material costs that are necessary to operate our business. Our presentation of Adjusted Net Trading Income should not be construed as an indication that our future results will be unaffected by revenues or expenses that are not directly associated with our core business activities.
    • “EBITDA”, which measures our operating performance by adjusting Net Income to exclude Financing interest expense on long-term borrowings, Debt issue cost related to debt refinancing, prepayment, and commitment fees, Depreciation and amortization, Amortization of purchased intangibles and acquired capitalized software, and Income tax expense, and “Adjusted EBITDA”, which measures our operating performance by further adjusting EBITDA to exclude severance, transaction advisory fees and expenses, termination of office leases, charges related to share-based compensation and other expenses, which includes reserves for legal matters, and Other, net, which includes gains and losses from strategic investments and the sales of businesses.
    • “Normalized Adjusted Net Income”, “Normalized Adjusted Net Income before income taxes”, “Normalized provision for income taxes”, and “Normalized Adjusted EPS”, which we calculate by adjusting Net Income to exclude certain items, and other non-cash items, assuming that all vested and unvested Virtu Financial Units have been exchanged for Class A Common Stock, and applying an effective tax rate, which was approximately 24%.
    • “Adjusted Operating Expenses”, which we calculate by adjusting total operating expenses to exclude severance, share based compensation, reserves for legal matters, termination of office leases, connectivity early termination and write-down of assets.

    Adjusted Net Trading Income, EBITDA, Adjusted EBITDA, Adjusted EBITDA Margin, Normalized Adjusted Net Income, Normalized Adjusted Net Income before income taxes, Normalized provision for income taxes, and Normalized Adjusted EPS and Adjusted Operating Expenses are non-GAAP financial measures used by management in evaluating operating performance and in making strategic decisions. Additional information provided regarding the breakdown of Total Adjusted Net Trading Income by category is also a non-GAAP financial measure but is not used by the Company in evaluating operating performance and in making strategic decisions. In addition, these non-GAAP financial measures or similar non-GAAP measures are used by research analysts, investment bankers and lenders to assess our operating performance. Management believes that the presentation of Adjusted Net Trading Income, EBITDA, Adjusted EBITDA, Adjusted EBITDA Margin, Normalized Adjusted Net Income, Normalized Adjusted Net Income before income taxes, Normalized provision for income taxes and Normalized Adjusted EPS provide useful information to investors regarding our results of operations because they assist both investors and management in analyzing and benchmarking the performance and value of our business. Adjusted Net Trading Income, EBITDA, Adjusted EBITDA, Adjusted EBITDA Margin, Normalized Adjusted Net Income, Normalized Adjusted Net Income before income taxes, Normalized provision for income taxes and Normalized Adjusted EPS provide indicators of general economic performance that are not affected by fluctuations in certain costs or other items. Accordingly, management believes that these measurements are useful for comparing general operating performance from period to period. Furthermore, our credit agreement contains tests based on metrics similar to Adjusted EBITDA. Other companies may define Adjusted Net Trading Income, Adjusted EBITDA, Adjusted EBITDA Margin, Normalized Adjusted Net Income, Normalized Adjusted Net Income before income taxes, Normalized provision for income taxes and Normalized Adjusted EPS differently, and as a result our measures of Adjusted Net Trading Income, Adjusted EBITDA, Adjusted EBITDA Margin, Normalized Adjusted Net Income, Normalized Adjusted Net Income before income taxes, Normalized provision for income taxes and Normalized Adjusted EPS may not be directly comparable to those of other companies. Although we use these non-GAAP financial measures as financial measures to assess the performance of our business, such use is limited because they do not include certain material costs necessary to operate our business.

    Adjusted Net Trading Income, EBITDA, Adjusted EBITDA, Normalized Adjusted Net Income before income taxes, Normalized provision for income taxes, Normalized Adjusted Net Income and Normalized Adjusted EPS should be considered in addition to, and not as a substitute for, Net Income in accordance with U.S. GAAP as a measure of performance. Our presentation of Adjusted Net Trading Income, EBITDA, Adjusted EBITDA, Adjusted EBITDA Margin, Normalized Adjusted Net Income, Normalized Adjusted Net Income before income taxes, Normalized provision for income taxes and Normalized Adjusted EPS should not be construed as an indication that our future results will be unaffected by unusual or nonrecurring items. Adjusted Net Trading Income, Normalized Adjusted Net Income, Normalized Adjusted Net Income before income taxes, Normalized provision for income taxes, Normalized Adjusted EPS and our EBITDA-based measures have limitations as analytical tools, and you should not consider them in isolation or as substitutes for analysis of our results as reported under U.S. GAAP. Some of these limitations are:

    • they do not reflect every cash expenditure, future requirements for capital expenditures or contractual commitments;
    • our EBITDA-based measures do not reflect the significant interest expense or the cash requirements necessary to service interest or principal payment on our debt;
    • although depreciation and amortization are non-cash charges, the assets being depreciated and amortized will often have to be replaced or require improvements in the future, and our EBITDA-based measures do not reflect any cash requirement for such replacements or improvements;
    • they are not adjusted for all non-cash income or expense items that are reflected in our statements of cash flows;
    • they do not reflect the impact of earnings or charges resulting from matters we consider not to be indicative of our ongoing operations; and
    • they do not reflect limitations on our costs related to transferring earnings from our subsidiaries to us.

    Because of these limitations, Adjusted Net Trading Income, EBITDA, Adjusted EBITDA, Normalized Adjusted Net Income before income taxes, Normalized provision for income taxes, Normalized Adjusted Net Income and Normalized Adjusted EPS are not intended as alternatives to Net Income as indicators of our operating performance and should not be considered as measures of discretionary cash available to us to invest in the growth of our business or as measures of cash that will be available to us to meet our obligations. We compensate for these limitations by using Adjusted Net Trading Income, EBITDA, Adjusted EBITDA, Normalized Adjusted Net Income before income taxes, Normalized provision for income taxes, Normalized Adjusted Net Income and Normalized Adjusted EPS along with other comparative tools, together with U.S. GAAP measurements, to assist in the evaluation of operating performance. These U.S. GAAP measurements include Net Income, cash flows from operations and cash flow data. See below a reconciliation of each non-GAAP measure to the most directly comparable GAAP measure.

    Virtu Financial, Inc. and Subsidiaries
    Condensed Consolidated Statements of Comprehensive Income (Unaudited)
        Three Months Ended
    March 31,
    (in thousands, except share and per share data)     2025       2024  
             
    Revenues:        
    Trading income, net   $ 589,983     $ 408,095  
    Interest and dividends income     109,053       105,992  
    Commissions, net and technology services     151,307       118,611  
    Other, net     (12,474 )     10,141  
    Total revenues     837,869       642,839  
             
    Operating Expenses:        
    Brokerage, exchange, clearance fees and payments for order flow, net     221,875       139,799  
    Communication and data processing     59,803       58,182  
    Employee compensation and payroll taxes     119,356       100,823  
    Interest and dividends expense     131,328       126,028  
    Operations and administrative     22,136       22,346  
    Depreciation and amortization     15,932       16,076  
    Amortization of purchased intangibles and acquired capitalized software     11,783       14,687  
    Termination of office leases     10       17  
    Debt issue cost related to debt refinancing, prepayment and commitment fees     1,681       1,694  
    Transaction advisory fees and expenses     338       135  
    Financing interest expense on long-term borrowings     29,891       23,232  
    Total operating expenses     614,133       503,019  
             
    Income before income taxes and noncontrolling interest     223,736       139,820  
    Provision for income taxes     34,101       28,512  
    Net income   $ 189,635     $ 111,308  
             
    Noncontrolling interest     (89,954 )     (55,491 )
             
    Net income available for common stockholders   $ 99,681     $ 55,817  
             
    Earnings per share:        
    Basic   $ 1.09     $ 0.59  
    Diluted   $ 1.08     $ 0.59  
             
    Weighted average common shares outstanding        
    Basic     85,681,015       88,999,122  
    Diluted     86,047,558       88,999,122  
             
    Comprehensive income:        
    Net income   $ 189,635     $ 111,308  
    Other comprehensive income        
    Foreign exchange translation adjustment, net of taxes     4,740       (3,526 )
    Net change in unrealized cash flow hedges gain (loss), net of taxes     (2,110 )     1,547  
    Comprehensive income   $ 192,265     $ 109,329  
    Less: Comprehensive income attributable to noncontrolling interest     (91,075 )     (54,655 )
    Comprehensive income available for common stockholders   $ 101,190     $ 54,674  
     
    Virtu Financial, Inc. and Subsidiaries
    Reconciliation to Non-GAAP Operating Data (Unaudited)
     

    The following tables reconcile Condensed Consolidated Statements of Comprehensive Income to arrive at Adjusted Net Trading Income, EBITDA, Adjusted EBITDA, and selected Operating Margins.

        Three Months Ended
    March 31,
    (in thousands, except percentages)     2025       2024  
             
    Reconciliation of Trading income, net to Adjusted Net Trading Income        
    Trading income, net   $ 589,983     $ 408,095  
    Commissions, net and technology services     151,307       118,611  
    Interest and dividends income     109,053       105,992  
    Brokerage, exchange, clearance fees and payments for order flow, net     (221,875 )     (139,799 )
    Interest and dividends expense     (131,328 )     (126,028 )
    Adjusted Net Trading Income   $ 497,140     $ 366,871  
             
    Reconciliation of Net Income to EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA        
    Net income     189,635       111,308  
    Financing interest expense on long-term borrowings     29,891       23,232  
    Debt issue cost related to debt refinancing, prepayment and commitment fees     1,681       1,694  
    Depreciation and amortization     15,932       16,076  
    Amortization of purchased intangibles and acquired capitalized software     11,783       14,687  
    Provision for income taxes     34,101       28,512  
    EBITDA   $ 283,023     $ 195,509  
    Severance     2,179       1,485  
    Transaction advisory fees and expenses     338       135  
    Termination of office leases     10       17  
    Other     12,501       (9,347 )
    Share based compensation     21,888       15,033  
    Adjusted EBITDA   $ 319,939     $ 202,832  
             
    Selected Operating Margins        
    GAAP Net income Margin (1)     22.6 %     17.3 %
    Non-GAAP Net income Margin (2)     38.1 %     30.3 %
    EBITDA Margin (3)     56.9 %     53.3 %
    Adjusted EBITDA Margin (4)     64.4 %     55.3 %
             
    1 Calculated by dividing Net income by Total revenue.        
    2 Calculated by dividing Net income by Adjusted Net Trading Income.        
    3 Calculated by dividing EBITDA by Adjusted Net Trading Income.        
    4 Calculated by dividing Adjusted EBITDA by Adjusted Net Trading Income.        
             
    Virtu Financial, Inc. and Subsidiaries
    Reconciliation to Non-GAAP Operating Data (Unaudited)
    (Continued)
     

    The following tables reconcile Condensed Consolidated Statements of Comprehensive Income to arrive at Normalized Adjusted Net Income before income taxes, Normalized provision for income taxes, Normalized Adjusted Net Income and Normalized Adjusted EPS.

        Three Months Ended
    March 31,
    (in thousands, except share and per share data)     2025     2024  
             
    Reconciliation of Net Income to Normalized Adjusted Net Income        
    Net income   $ 189,635   $ 111,308  
    Provision for income taxes     34,101     28,512  
    Income before income taxes and noncontrolling interest   $ 223,736   $ 139,820  
    Amortization of purchased intangibles and acquired capitalized software     11,783     14,687  
    Debt issue cost related to debt refinancing, prepayment and commitment fees     1,681     1,694  
    Severance     2,179     1,485  
    Transaction advisory fees and expenses     338     135  
    Termination of office leases     10     17  
    Other     12,501     (9,347 )
    Share based compensation     21,888     15,033  
    Normalized Adjusted Net Income before income taxes   $ 274,116   $ 163,524  
    Normalized provision for income taxes (1)     65,787     39,246  
    Normalized Adjusted Net Income   $ 208,329   $ 124,278  
             
    Weighted Average Adjusted shares outstanding (2)     160,301,753     162,842,086  
             
    Normalized Adjusted EPS   $ 1.30   $ 0.76  
             
    (1) Reflects U.S. federal, state, and local income tax rate applicable to corporations of approximately 24% for all periods presented.
    (2) Assumes that (1) holders of all vested and unvested non-vesting Virtu Financial Units (together with corresponding shares of the Company’s Class C common stock, par value $0.00001 per share (the “Class C Common Stock”)) have exercised their right to exchange such Virtu Financial Units for shares of Class A Common Stock on a one-for-one basis, (2) holders of all Virtu Financial Units (together with corresponding shares of the Company’s Class D common stock, par value $0.00001 per share (the “Class D Common Stock”)) have exercised their right to exchange such Virtu Financial Units for shares of the Company’s Class B common stock, par value $0.00001 per share (the “Class B Common Stock”) on a one-for-one basis, and subsequently exercised their right to convert the shares of Class B Common Stock into shares of Class A Common Stock on a one-for-one basis. Includes additional shares from the dilutive impact of options, restricted stock units and restricted stock awards outstanding under the Amended and Restated 2015 Management Incentive Plan during the three months ended March 31, 2025 and 2024.
    Virtu Financial, Inc. and Subsidiaries
    Condensed Consolidated Statements of Financial Condition (Unaudited)
    (in thousands, except share data)   March 31,
    2025
      December 31,
    2024
             
    Assets        
    Cash and cash equivalents   $ 723,650   $ 872,513  
    Cash and securities segregated under regulations and other     47,364     41,478  
    Securities borrowed     2,780,405     2,294,529  
    Securities purchased under agreements to resell     1,153,090     983,941  
    Receivables from broker-dealers and clearing organizations     1,857,854     1,100,850  
    Receivables from customers     189,382     149,804  
    Trading assets, at fair value     8,720,981     7,802,652  
    Property, equipment and capitalized software, net     92,815     91,415  
    Operating lease right-of-use assets     163,230     175,046  
    Goodwill     1,148,926     1,148,926  
    Intangibles (net of accumulated amortization)     190,280     203,188  
    Deferred taxes     125,762     135,046  
    Assets of business held for sale     4,573     4,615  
    Other assets     349,902     357,740  
    Total assets     17,548,214     15,361,743  
             
    Liabilities and equity        
    Liabilities        
    Short-term borrowings, net     112,149     38,541  
    Securities loaned     2,827,025     2,431,878  
    Securities sold under agreements to repurchase     1,461,415     1,271,788  
    Payables to broker-dealers and clearing organizations     774,809     918,566  
    Payables to customers     66,732     46,112  
    Trading liabilities, at fair value     8,116,856     6,440,971  
    Tax receivable agreement obligations     175,819     196,592  
    Accounts payable and accrued expenses and other liabilities     492,892     558,100  
    Operating lease liabilities     216,314     229,825  
    Long-term borrowings, net     1,741,092     1,740,467  
    Liabilities of business held for sale     1,455     1,526  
    Total liabilities     15,986,558     13,874,366  
             
    Total equity     1,561,656     1,487,377  
             
    Total liabilities and equity   $ 17,548,214   $ 15,361,743  
             
        As of March 31, 2025
    Ownership of Virtu Financial LLC Interests:   Interests   %
    Virtu Financial, Inc. – Class A Common Stock and Restricted Stock Units     91,932,822     57.4 %
    Non-controlling Interests (Virtu Financial LLC)     68,286,587     42.6 %
    Total Virtu Financial LLC Interests     160,219,409     100.0 %
     

    About Virtu Financial, Inc.

    Virtu is a leading financial services firm that leverages cutting-edge technology to provide execution services and data, analytics and connectivity products to its clients and deliver liquidity to the global markets. Leveraging its global market making expertise and infrastructure, Virtu provides a robust product suite including offerings in execution, liquidity sourcing, analytics and broker-neutral, multi-dealer platforms in workflow technology. Virtu’s product offerings allow clients to trade on hundreds of venues across 50+ countries and in multiple asset classes, including global equities, ETFs, foreign exchange, futures, fixed income and myriad other commodities. In addition, Virtu’s integrated, multi-asset analytics platform provides a range of pre and post-trade services, data products and compliance tools that clients rely upon to invest, trade and manage risk across global markets.

    Cautionary Note Regarding Forward-Looking Statements

    This press release may contain “forward-looking statements” made pursuant to the safe harbor provisions of the Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995. Statements regarding Virtu Financial, Inc.’s (“Virtu’s”, the “Company’s” or “our”) business that are not historical facts are forward-looking statements. Forward-looking statements should not be read as a guarantee of future performance or results, and will not necessarily be accurate indications of the times at, or by which, such performance or results will be achieved. The Company assumes no obligation to update forward-looking statements to reflect actual results, changes in assumptions or changes in other factors affecting forward-looking information, and if the Company does update one or more forward-looking statements, no inference should be drawn that the Company will make additional updates with respect thereto or with respect to other forward-looking statements. Forward-looking statements are based on information available at the time and/or management’s good faith belief with respect to future events, and is subject to risks and uncertainties, some or all of which are not predictable or within Virtu’s control, that could cause actual performance or results to differ materially from those expressed in the statements. Those risks and uncertainties include, without limitation: risks relating to fluctuations in trading volume and volatilities in the markets in which we operate; the ability of our trading counterparties, clients, and various clearing houses to perform their obligations to us; the performance and reliability of our customized trading platform; the risk of material trading losses from our market making activities; swings in valuations in securities or other instruments in which we hold positions; increasing competition and consolidation in our industry; the risk that cash flow from our operations and other available sources of liquidity will not be sufficient to fund our various ongoing obligations, including operating expenses, short-term funding requirements, margin requirements, capital expenditures, debt service and dividend payments; potential consequences of pending SEC proposals by the prior administration focused on equity markets which may, if adopted, result in reduced overall and off-exchange trading volumes and market making opportunities, impose additional or heightened regulatory obligations on market makers and other market participants, and generally increase the implicit and explicit cost as well as the complexity of the U.S. equities eco-system for all participants; regulatory and legal uncertainties and potential changes associated with our industry, particularly in light of increased attention from media, regulators and lawmakers to market structure and related issues including but not limited to the retail trading environment, wholesale market making and off exchange trading more generally and payment for order flow arrangements; potential adverse results from legal or regulatory proceedings; our ability to remain technologically competitive and to ensure that the technology we utilize is not vulnerable to security risks, hacking and cyber-attacks; risks associated with third party software and technology infrastructure. For a discussion of the risks and uncertainties which could cause actual results to differ from those contained in forward-looking statements, see Virtu’s Securities and Exchange Commission filings, including but not limited to Virtu’s Annual Report on Form 10-K, Quarterly Reports on Form 10-Q and Current Reports on Form 8-K filed with the SEC.

    CONTACT         

    Investor & Media Relations
    Andrew Smith
    investor_relations@virtu.com
    media@virtu.com

    The MIL Network

  • MIL-OSI United Kingdom: Joint statement between the Prime Minister of the United Kingdom and the Prime Minister of New Zealand

    Source: United Kingdom – Executive Government & Departments

    Press release

    Joint statement between the Prime Minister of the United Kingdom and the Prime Minister of New Zealand

    This Joint Statement follows the meeting of the United Kingdom and New Zealand Prime Ministers in London on 22 April 2025.

    This Joint Statement follows the meeting of the United Kingdom and New Zealand Prime Ministers in London on 22 April 2025.

    Reflecting on the enduring UK-NZ partnership, underpinned by shared values, rich connections between our people, and profound mutual trust, and cognisant of these uncertain times, the Prime Ministers expressed high ambition to deepen cooperation to ensure our modern and dynamic partnership continues to thrive, and contributes to our security and prosperity. We are energised by our shared commitment to deliver for our people.

    The Prime Ministers reiterated their commitment to upholding the fundamental principles that underpin our partnership – democracy, human rights and the rule of law – which are central to a stable international order. They reaffirmed their commitment to international cooperation to address global challenges, supported by effective and efficient multilateral institutions, and recognised the indivisibility of the security and prosperity of the Euro-Atlantic and Indo-Pacific regions.

    The Prime Ministers reiterated their unwavering support for Ukraine and welcomed US-led efforts to achieve a just and lasting peace for Ukraine. The United Kingdom and New Zealand called on Russia to withdraw its forces immediately and end its illegal invasion. They called on those supporting Russia’s Military-Industrial Complex through the supply of dual use components and weapons, to cease fuelling Russia’s war against Ukraine. The Prime Ministers expressed gratitude to the military personnel of the United Kingdom and New Zealand who have trained over 54,000 Ukrainians through Operation Interflex the UK-led multinational training effort. As the conflict evolves, both Leaders agreed to coordinate on training to meet Ukraine’s evolving needs.

    The Prime Ministers welcomed on-going discussions on future support for Ukraine as part of the UK and France-led Coalition of the Willing – a multinational reassurance force to support Ukraine’s long-term defence and security. Prime Minister Starmer thanked New Zealand for its ongoing participation in military and diplomatic discussions about possible post-conflict support for Ukraine.

    Noting the mounting threats to international peace and security, the Prime Ministers noted the decisions taken by both governments to substantially increase defence spending. They agreed to renew our historic defence partnership to make it fit for the future, and to deepen cooperation in our defence capabilities and industries.

    The Prime Ministers acknowledged the ongoing cooperation between our defence forces on global challenges, including in the Middle East and Indo-Pacific. Prime Minister Starmer welcomed New Zealand’s upcoming participation in the UK-led Carrier Strike Group deployment in the Indo-Pacific, and welcomed ongoing consultations as New Zealand continues to explore potential opportunities for participation in AUKUS Pillar II.    

    The Prime Ministers agreed that maintaining peace and stability across the Taiwan Strait is indispensable to international security and prosperity. They reiterated their concern at China’s recent military exercises around Taiwan and called for the peaceful resolution of cross-Strait Issues.

    The Prime Ministers reaffirmed their commitment to work together to promote the prosperity, security and resilience of Pacific Small Island Developing States. In the context of climate change they welcomed joint work on the TIDES renewable energy investment fund.

    Free trade is a cornerstone of prosperity in both countries. Recognising that open markets, and reliable legal and regulatory frameworks are essential for trade, the Prime Ministers committed to strengthening and modernising the rules-based trading system. The Prime Ministers welcomed our enhanced trading relationship since the entry into force of the UK-NZ Free Trade Agreement, with the United Kingdom now one of New Zealand’s fastest growing export markets.

    The Prime Ministers agreed to work together to strengthen the role that free trade plays in increasing prosperity, including the Comprehensive and Progressive Agreement for Trans-Pacific Partnership (which the United Kingdom and New Zealand are Parties to). This includes growing the agreement ambitiously through further accessions and pursuing concrete updates through the ongoing General Review.

    Noting that economic growth and improving the lives of British and New Zealand citizens are fundamental priorities for both governments, the Prime Ministers welcomed the signing of commercial deals including on clean technology and infrastructure.

    The Prime Ministers agreed to further enhance our mutual security and prosperity by: 

    • Forging a new Clean Energy Partnership to encourage two-way investment in renewable energy and low and zero emissions technologies.
    • Launching an investor partnership for New Zealand investment into agritech SMEs in the UK, and collaboration on Earth Observation from space.
    • Affirming our partnership with, and support for, Pacific Island countries’ climate resilience through clean energy, ecosystem resilience, and climate adaptation.
    • Continuing close cooperation to protect Antarctica as a place for peace and science and upholding the Antarctic Treaty System.
    • Strengthening cooperation in support of the rules-based system, including through reform of multilateral institutions.
    • Updating our Double Taxation Agreement to provide long term certainty and stability to business.
    • Recognising the renewed mutual recognition of professional qualifications between Engineering New Zealand and UK’s Engineering Council.
    • Modernising our Film and TV Co-production Treaty to promote the growth of our world-class screen industries and bring more iconic stories to the screen.

    Updates to this page

    Published 23 April 2025

    MIL OSI United Kingdom

  • MIL-OSI Asia-Pac: Joint Statement at the conclusion of the State Visit of Prime Minister to the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia

    Source: Government of India

    Posted On: 23 APR 2025 12:44PM by PIB Delhi

    “A Historic Friendship; A Partnership for Progress”

    At the invitation of His Royal Highness Prince Mohammed bin Salman bin Abdulaziz Al Saud, Crown Prince and Prime Minister of the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia, Hon’ble Prime Minister of the Republic of India, Shri Narendra Modi paid a State Visit to the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia on April 22, 2025.

    This was Prime Minister Shri Narendra Modi’s third visit to the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia. It followed the historic State Visit of HRH Prince Mohammed bin Salman bin Abdulaziz Al Saud, Crown Prince and Prime Minister of the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia’s visit to India in September 2023 to participate in the G-20 Summit and co-chair the first meeting of the India- Saudi Arabia Strategic Partnership Council.

    His Royal Highness Prince Mohammed bin Salman bin Abdulaziz Al Saud, Crown Prince and Prime Minister, received Prime Minister Shri Narendra Modi at Al-Salam Palace, Jeddah.They held official talks, during which they recalled the strong bonds of historically close friendship between the Republic of India and the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia. India and Saudi Arabia enjoy a strong relationship and close people-to-people ties marked by trust and goodwill. The two sides noted that the solid foundation of the bilateral relationship between the two nations has further strengthened through the strategic partnership covering diverse areas including defense, security, energy, trade, investment, technology, agriculture, culture, health, education, and people-to-people ties. Both sides also exchanged views on current regional and international issues of mutual interest.

    Prime Minister Shri Narendra Modi congratulated HRH Prince Mohammed bin Salman bin Abdulaziz Al Saud, Crown Prince and Prime Minister of Kingdom of Saudi Arabia for Saudi Arabia’s successful bids for World Expo 2030 and FIFA World Cup 2034.

    The two leaders held constructive discussions on ways to strengthen the strategic partnership between India and the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia. The two leaders also co-chaired the second meeting of the India-Saudi Arabia Strategic Partnership Council (SPC). The two sides reviewed the progress of the Strategic Partnership Council since their last meeting in September 2023. Both leaders expressed their satisfaction with the outcomes of the work of the two Ministerial Committees, namely: (a) the Committee on Political, Security, Social and Cultural Cooperation and their subcommittees and (b) the Committee on Economy and Investment and their Joint Working Groups, in diverse fields. In this context, the Co-Chairs of the Council welcomed the expansion of the Strategic Partnership Council to four Ministerial Committees reflecting the deepening of the Strategic Partnership, by addition of the Ministerial Committees on Defence Cooperation, and Tourism and Cultural Cooperation. The two leaders noted with appreciation the large number of high-level visits across various Ministries that have built trust and mutual understanding on both sides. At the end of the Meeting, the two leaders signed the Minutes of the Second Meeting of the India-Saudi Arabia Strategic Partnership Council.

    The Indian side expressed its appreciation to the Saudi side for the continuing welfare of around 2.7 million Indian nationals residing in the Kingdom, reflecting the strong people- to-people bonds and immense goodwill that exists between the two nations. The Indian side also congratulated Saudi Arabia for successfully holding the Haj pilgrimage in 2024 and expressed its appreciation for the excellent coordination between the two countries in facilitating Indian Haj and Umrah pilgrims.

    Both sides welcomed the growth of the economic relationship, trade and investment ties between India and Kingdom of Saudi Arabia in recent years. The Indian side congratulated the Saudi side for progress achieved on the goals under Vision 2030. Saudi side expressed appreciation for India’s sustained economic growth and the goal of Viksit Bharat or becoming a developed country by 2047. Both sides agreed to work together in areas of mutual interests to fulfill respective national goals and achieve shared prosperity.

    Both Leaders noted with satisfaction the progress made in the discussions under the High-Level Task Force (HLTF), constituted in 2024 for promoting investment flows between the two countries. Building on the endeavor of Saudi Arabia to invest in India in multiple areas including energy, petrochemicals, infrastructure, technology, fintech, digital infrastructure, telecommunications, pharmaceuticals, manufacturing and health, it was noted that the High-Level Task Force came to an understanding in multiple areas which will rapidly promote such investment flows. They noted the agreement in the High-Level Task Force to collaborate on establishing two refineries. The progress made by this Task Force in areas such as taxation was also a major breakthrough for greater cooperation in the future. The two sides affirmed their desire to complete negotiations on the Bilateral Investment Treaty at the earliest. The Indian side appreciated the launch of India Desk at the Public Investment Fund (PIF) to act as the nodal point for investment facilitation by PIF. They observed that work of the High-Level Task Force underscores the growing economic partnership between India and Saudi Arabia focusing on mutual economic growth and collaborative investments.

    The two sides affirmed their commitment to strengthening their direct and indirect investment partnership. They commended the outcomes of the Saudi-India Investment Forum, held in New Delhi in September 2023, and the active cooperation it achieved between the public and private sectors from both countries. They also commended the expansion of investment activities by Indian companies in the Kingdom, and appreciated the role of the private sector in enhancing mutual investments.The two sides valued the activation of the Framework of Cooperation on Enhancing Bilateral Investment between Invest India and Ministry of Investment of Saudi Arabia. Both sides agreed to facilitate enhanced bilateral cooperation in the startup ecosystem, contributing to mutual growth and innovation.

    In the field of Energy, the Indian side agreed to work with the Kingdom to enhance the stability of global oil markets and to balance global energy market dynamics. They emphasized the need to ensure security of supply for all energy sources in global markets. They agreed on the importance of enhancing cooperation in several areas in the energy sector, including the supply of crude oil and its derivatives including LPG, collaboration in India’s Strategic Reserve Program, joint projects across the refining and petrochemical sector, including manufacturing and specialized industries, innovative uses of hydrocarbons, electricity, and renewable energy, including completing the detailed joint study for electrical interconnection between the two countries, exchanging expertise in the fields of grid automation, grid connectivity, electrical grid security and resilience, and renewable energy projects and energy storage technologies, and enhancing the participation of companies from both sides in implementing their projects.

    The two sides emphasized the importance of cooperation in the field of green/clean hydrogen, including stimulating demand, developing hydrogen transport and storage technologies, exchanging expertise and experiences to implement best practices. The two sides also acknowledged the need to work on developing supply chains and projects linked to the energy sector, enabling cooperation between companies, enhancing cooperation in the field of energy efficiency and rationalizing energy consumption in the buildings, industry, and transportation sectors, and raising awareness of its importance.

    With regard to climate change, both sides reaffirmed the importance of adhering to the principles of the United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change and the Paris Agreement, and the need to develop and implement climate agreements with a focus on emissions rather than sources. The Indian side commended the Kingdom’s launch of the “Saudi Green Initiative” and the “Middle East Green Initiative”and expressed its support for the Kingdom’s efforts in the field of climate change. The two sides stressed the importance of joint cooperation to develop applications of the circular carbon economy by promoting policies that use the circular carbon economy as a tool to manage emissions and achieve climate change objectives.The Kingdom of Saudi Arabia appreciated India’s contributions to global climate action by pioneering initiatives like International Solar Alliance, One Sun-One World-One Grid, Coalition of Disaster Resilient Infrastructure (CDRI) and Mission Lifestyle for Environment (LiFE) and Global Green Credit Initiative.

    Both sides expressed satisfaction at the steady growth in bilateral trade in recent years with India being the second largest trading partner for Saudi Arabia; and Saudi Arabia being India’s fifth largest trading partner in 2023-2024. Both sides agreed to further enhance co-operation to diversify their bilateral trade. In this regard, both sides agreed on the importance of increasing visits of business and trade delegations, and holding trade and investment events. Both sides reiterated their desire for commencing negotiations on the India-GCC FTA.

    The two sides appreciated the deepening of the defence ties as a key pillar of the Strategic Partnership, and welcomed the creation of a Ministerial Committee on Defence Cooperation under the Strategic Partnership Council. They noted with satisfaction the growth of their joint defence cooperation including numerous ‘firsts’ like the first ever Land Forces exercise SADA TANSEEQ, two rounds of the Naval Exercises AL MOHED AL HINDI, many high-level visits, and training exchanges, towards ensuring the security and stability of the region. They welcomed the outcomes of the 6th meeting of the Joint Committee on Defence Cooperation held in Riyadh in September 2024, noting the initiation of staff-level talks between all three services. Both sides also agreed to enhance defence industry collaboration.

    Noting the continuing cooperation achieved in security fields, both sides highlighted the importance of this cooperation for better security and stability. They also emphasized the importance of furthering cooperation between both sides in the areas of cybersecurity, maritime border security, combating transnational crime, narcotics and drug trafficking.

    Both sides strongly condemned the gruesome terror attack in Pahalgam, Jammu and Kashmir on 22 April 2025, which claimed the lives of innocent civilians. In this context, the two sides condemned terrorism and violent extremism in all its forms and manifestations, and emphasized that this remains one of the gravest threats to humanity. They agreed that there cannot be any justification for any act of terror for any reason whatsoever. They rejected any attempt to link terrorism to any particular race, religion or culture. They welcomed the excellent cooperation between the two sides in counter-terrorism and the terror financing. They condemned cross-border terrorism, and called on all States to reject the use of terrorism against other countries, dismantle terrorism infrastructure where it exists, and bring perpetrators of terrorism to justice swiftly. Both sides stressed the need to prevent access to weapons including missiles and drones to commit terrorist acts against other countries.

    The two sides noted the ongoing cooperation in field of health and efforts to combat current and future health risks and health challenges. In this context, they welcomed the signing of the MOU on Cooperation in the Field of Health between the two countries. The Indian side congratulated the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia for successfully hosting the Fourth Ministerial Conference on Antimicrobial Resistance in Jeddah in November 2024. Indian side welcomed the initiatives taken by the Saudi Food and Drug Authority to address issues related to reference pricing and fast track registration of Indian drugs in Saudi Arabia. Both sides also welcomed the extension of the MoU on Co-operation in the Field of Medical Products Regulation between Saudi Food and Drug Authority and Central Drugs Standard Control Organization (CDSCO) for a further period of five years.

    Both sides underscored the importance of co-operation in technology including in new and emerging domains such as Artificial Intelligence, cybersecurity, semi-conductors etc. Highlighting the importance of digital governance,both sides agreed to explore collaboration in this area. They also expressed satisfaction on signing of the MOU between Telecom Regulatory Authority of India and Communications, Space and Technology Commission of Kingdom of Saudi Arabia for cooperation in regulatory and digital sectors.

    Both sides noted that the MoU on space cooperation signed during this visit will pave the way for enhanced cooperation in the field of space, including utilization of launch vehicles, spacecraft, ground systems; applications of space technology; research and development; academic engagement and entrepreneurship.

    Both sides noted the growth of cultural cooperation between the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia and the Republic of India through active engagement in key sectors such as heritage, film, literature, and performing and visual arts. The creation of a Ministerial Committee on Tourism and Cultural Cooperation under the Strategic Partnership Council marks a significant step toward deepening this partnership.

    Both sides also agreed to enhance cooperation in tourism including through capacity building and sustainable tourism. They also noted the expansion of various opportunities in media, entertainment, and sports, supported by the strong people-to-people ties between the two countries.

    Both sides appreciated the long-standing cooperation between the two countries in the areas of agriculture and food security, including trade of fertilizers. They agreed to pursue long-term agreements for the security of supply, mutual investments and joint projects towards building long-term strategic cooperation in this area.

    The two sides commended the growing momentum in educational and scientific collaboration between the two countries, underscoring its strategic importance in fostering innovation, capacity building, and sustainable development. The Saudi side welcomes the opportunities for leading Indian universities to have presence in Saudi Arabia.The two sides also stressed the value of expanding cooperation in labour and human resources and identifying opportunities for collaboration.

    Both sides recalled the signing of the Memorandum of Understanding on the Principles of an India-Middle East-Europe Economic Corridor along with other countries in September 2023 during the state visit of HRH Prince Mohammed bin Salman bin Abdulaziz Al Saud, Crown Prince and Prime Minister of Kingdom of Saudi Arabia to India and expressed mutual commitment to work together to realize the vision of connectivity as envisaged in the Corridor, including the development of infrastructure that includes railways and port linkages to increase the passage of goods and services, and boost trade among stakeholders, and enhance data connectivity and electrical grid interconnectivity. In this regard, both sides welcomed the progress under the MoU on Electrical Interconnections, Clean/Green Hydrogen and Supply Chains signed in October 2023. Both sides also expressed satisfaction on the increase in shipping lines between the two countries.

    The two sides stressed the importance of enhancing cooperation and coordination between the two countries in international organizations and forums, including the G20, the International Monetary Fund, and the World Bank, to bolster efforts to address the challenges facing the global economy. They commended the existing cooperation between them within the Common Framework for Debt Treatment Beyond the Debt Service Suspension Initiative (DSSI), which was endorsed by the G20 leaders at the Riyadh Summit 2020. They stressed the importance of enhancing the implementation of the Common Framework as the main and most comprehensive platform for coordination between official creditors (developing country creditors and Paris Club creditors) and the private sector to address the debt of eligible countries.

    The two sides affirmed their full support for the international and regional efforts aimed at reaching a comprehensive political solution to the crisis in Yemen. The Indian side appreciated the Kingdom’s many initiatives aimed at encouraging dialogue between the Yemeni parties, and its role in providing and facilitating access of humanitarian aid to all regions of Yemen. The Saudi side also appreciated the Indian effort in providing humanitarian aid to Yemen.The two sides agreed on the importance of cooperation to promote ways to ensure the security and safety of waterways and freedom of navigation in line with the United Nations Convention on the Law of the Sea (UNCLOS).

    The following MoUs were signed during the visit:

    • MoU between Department of Space, India, and Saudi Space Agency in the field of space activities for peaceful purposes.

    • MoU between Ministry of Health and Family Welfare, Republic of India and Ministry of Health, Kingdom of Saudi Arabia & on Cooperation in the Field of Health.

    • Bilateral Agreement between Department of Posts, India and Saudi Post Corporation (SPL) for inward foreign surface parcel.

    • MOU between National Anti-Doping Agency of India (NADA), India, and Saudi Arabia Anti-Doping Committee (SAADC) for cooperation in the field of anti-doping and prevention.

    Both sides agreed to hold the next meeting of the Strategic Partnership Council on a date mutually agreed upon. As the two nations march ahead with economic and social developments in their respective countries, they also decided, that they will continue communication, coordination and cooperation across various sectors.

    At the end of the visit, Prime Minister Shri Narendra Modi, expressed his sincere thanks and appreciation to His Royal Highness Prince Mohammed bin Salman bin Abdulaziz Al Saud, Crown Prince and Prime Minister, for the warm reception and generous hospitality extended to him and his accompanying delegation. He also conveyed his best wishes for continued progress and prosperity of the friendly people of the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia. For his part, His Royal Highness extended his sincere wishes to Prime Minister Narendra Modi and the friendly people of India for further progress and prosperity.

    ***

    MJPS/VJ

    (Release ID: 2123722) Visitor Counter : 170

    MIL OSI Asia Pacific News

  • MIL-OSI Asia-Pac: DPIIT Secretary chairs PMG review of mega infrastructure projects in Uttar Pradesh, Haryana, Punjab and Uttarakhand

    Source: Government of India

    DPIIT Secretary chairs PMG review of mega infrastructure projects in Uttar Pradesh, Haryana, Punjab and Uttarakhand

    Projects worth over ₹14,096 crore reviewed

    Posted On: 23 APR 2025 1:35PM by PIB Delhi

    Secretary, Department for Promotion of Industry and Internal Trade (DPIIT), Shri Amardeep Bhatia, chaired a high-level meeting to review mega infrastructure projects in the states of Uttar Pradesh, Haryana, Punjab, and Uttarakhand. The review meeting, conducted under the aegis of the Project Monitoring Group (PMG), was attended by senior officials from central ministries, state governments, and project proponents.

    During the meeting, 19 issues across 17 significant projects were reviewed, with the total cost of these projects exceeding ₹14,096 crore. The discussions focused on fast-tracking resolution of implementation challenges through enhanced inter-ministerial and inter-state coordination.

    Among the major projects reviewed was the four-laning of the Jaunpur-Akbarpur road project, valued at ₹3,164.72 crore. The project involves two key issues across two work packages, and is crucial for improving regional connectivity and road infrastructure.

    The meeting also laid emphasis on the establishment of new ESI Hospitals at multiple strategic locations. These projects are part of the Government of India’s broader effort to strengthen healthcare infrastructure, particularly in underserved and high-demand regions. Shri Bhatia noted that the hospitals will significantly improve access to quality medical care and contribute to regional development, thereby supporting the well-being of the workforce and their families.

    The construction of the permanent campus of NIT Uttarakhand at Sumari in Pauri Garhwal district was another key project reviewed. Aimed at strengthening the region’s educational ecosystem, the campus will provide a state-of-the-art academic and administrative environment for the institute. Once operational, it is expected to elevate the quality of technical education and research in Uttarakhand and spur local socio-economic development.

    Shri Bhatia reiterated the Government’s commitment to reinforcing the institutional framework for project monitoring and urged all stakeholders to adopt a proactive approach for issue resolution. He encouraged private sector participants to actively engage with the PMG platform (https://pmg.dpiit.gov.in/) to expedite project implementation by leveraging streamlined coordination with the government and other key entities.

    ***

    Abhishek Dayal/ Abhijith Narayanan/ Ishita Biswas

    (Release ID: 2123748) Visitor Counter : 84

    MIL OSI Asia Pacific News

  • MIL-OSI Asia-Pac: President Lai pays respects to Pope Francis  

    Source: Republic of China Taiwan

    Details
    2025-04-23
    President Lai meets US CNAS NextGen fellows
    On the morning of April 23, President Lai Ching-te met with fellows from the Shawn Brimley Next Generation National Security Leaders Program (NextGen) run by the Center for a New American Security (CNAS). In remarks, President Lai thanked the government of the United States for continuing its arms sales to Taiwan over the years, supporting Taiwan’s efforts to enhance its national defense capabilities and jointly maintaining peace and stability in the Indo-Pacific region. The president pointed out that we will promote our “Taiwan plus one” policy, that is, new arrangements for Taiwan plus the US, and form a “Taiwan investment in the US team” to expand investment and bring about even closer Taiwan-US trade cooperation, allowing us to reduce the trade deficit and generate development that benefits both sides. A translation of President Lai’s remarks follows: Ms. Michèle Flournoy, chair of the CNAS Board of Directors, is a good friend of Taiwan, and she has made major contributions to Taiwan-US relations through her long-time efforts on various aspects of our cooperation. I am happy to welcome Chair Flournoy, who is once again leading a NextGen Fellowship delegation to Taiwan. CNAS is a prominent think tank focusing on US national security and defense policy based in Washington, DC. Its NextGen Fellowship has fostered talented individuals in the fields of national security and foreign affairs. This year’s delegation is significantly larger than those of the past, demonstrating the increased importance that the next generation of US leaders attach to Taiwan. On behalf of the people of Taiwan, I extend my sincerest welcome to you all. The Taiwan Strait, an issue of importance for our guests, has become a global issue. There is a high degree of international consensus that peace and stability across the Taiwan Strait are indispensable elements in global security and prosperity. Facing military threats from China, Taiwan proposed the Four Pillars of Peace action plan. First, we are actively implementing military reforms, enhancing whole-of-society defense resilience, and working to increase our defense budget to more than 3 percent of GDP. Second, we are strengthening our economic resilience. As Taiwan’s economy must keep advancing, we can no longer put all our eggs in one basket. We are taking action to remain firmly rooted in Taiwan while expanding our global presence and marketing worldwide. In these efforts, we are already seeing results. Third, we are standing side-by-side with other democratic countries to demonstrate the strength of deterrence and achieve our goal of peace through strength. And fourth, Taiwan is willing, under the principles of parity and dignity, to conduct exchanges and cooperate with China towards achieving peace and stability in the Taiwan Strait. This April 10 marked the 46th anniversary of the enactment of the Taiwan Relations Act. We thank the US government for continuing its arms sales to Taiwan over the years, supporting Taiwan’s efforts to enhance its national defense capabilities and jointly maintaining peace and stability in the Indo-Pacific region. We look forward to Taiwan and the US continuing to strengthen collaboration on the development of both our defense industries as well as the building of non-red supply chains. This will yield even more results and further deepen our economic and trade partnership. The US is now the main destination for outbound investment from Taiwan. Moving forward, we will promote our “Taiwan plus one” policy, that is, new arrangements for Taiwan plus the US. And our government will form a “Taiwan investment in the US team” to expand investment. We hope this will bring Taiwan-US economic and trade cooperation even closer and, through mutually beneficial assistance, allow us to generate development that benefits both our sides while reducing our trade deficit. In closing, thank you once again for visiting Taiwan. We hope your trip is fruitful and leaves you with a deep impression of Taiwan. We also hope that going forward you continue supporting Taiwan and advancing even greater development for Taiwan-US ties.  Chair Flournoy then delivered remarks, first thanking President Lai for making time to receive their delegation. Referring to President Lai’s earlier remarks, she said that it is quite an impressive group, as past members of this program have gone on to become members of the US Congress, leading government experts, and leaders in the think-tank world and in the private sector. She remarked that investing in this group is a wonderful privilege for her and that they appreciate President Lai’s agreeing to take the time to engage in exchange with them. Chair Flournoy emphasized that they are visiting Taiwan at a critical moment, when there is so much change and volatility in the geostrategic environment, a lot of uncertainty, and a lot of unpredictability. She stated that given our shared values, our shared passion for democracy and human rights, and our shared interests in peace and stability in the Indo-Pacific region, this is an important time for dialogue, collaboration, and looking for additional opportunities where we can work together towards regional peace and stability.

    Details
    2025-04-18
    President Lai meets US delegation from Senate Foreign Relations Subcommittee on East Asia and the Pacific
    On the afternoon of April 18, President Lai Ching-te met with a delegation led by Senator Pete Ricketts, chairman of the United States Senate Foreign Relations Subcommittee on East Asia, the Pacific, and International Cybersecurity Policy. In remarks, President Lai said we hope to promote our Taiwan plus one policy, that is, new industrial arrangements for Taiwan plus the US, to leverage the strengths of both sides and reinforce our links in such areas as the economy, trade, and technological innovation. The president said that by deepening cooperation, Taiwan and the US will be better positioned to work together on building non-red supply chains. He said a more secure and sustainable economic and trade partnership will allow us to address the challenges posed by geopolitics, climate change, and the restructuring of global supply chains. A translation of President Lai’s remarks follows: I warmly welcome you all to Taiwan. I want to take this opportunity to especially thank Chairman Pete Ricketts and Ranking Member Chris Coons for their high regard and support for Taiwan. Chairman Ricketts has elected to visit Taiwan on his first overseas trip since taking up his new position in January. Ranking Member Coons made a dedicated trip to Taiwan in 2021 to announce a donation of COVID-19 vaccines on behalf of the US government. He also visited last May, soon after my inauguration, continuing to deepen Taiwan-US exchanges. Thanks to support from Chairman Ricketts and Ranking Member Coons, the US Congress has continued to introduce many concrete initiatives and resources to assist Taiwan through the National Defense Authorization Act and Consolidated Appropriations Act, bringing the Taiwan-US partnership even closer. For this, I want to again express my gratitude. There has long been bipartisan support in the US Congress for maintaining security in the Taiwan Strait. Faced with China’s persistent political and military intimidation, Taiwan will endeavor to reform national defense and enhance whole-of-society defense resilience. We will also make special budget allocations to ensure that our defense budget exceeds 3 percent of GDP, up from the current 2.5 percent, so as to enhance Taiwan’s self-defense capabilities. We look forward to Taiwan and the US continuing to work together to maintain peace and stability in the region. We will also promote our Taiwan plus one policy, that is, new industrial arrangements for Taiwan plus the US. We hope to leverage the strengths of both sides and reinforce our links in such areas as the economy, trade, and technological innovation, jointly promoting prosperity and development. We believe that by deepening cooperation through the Taiwan plus one policy, Taiwan and the US will be better positioned to work together on building non-red supply chains. A more secure and sustainable economic and trade partnership will allow us to address the challenges posed by geopolitics, climate change, and the restructuring of global supply chains. In closing, I wish Chairman Ricketts and Ranking Member Coons a smooth and successful visit. Chairman Ricketts then delivered remarks, first thanking President Lai for his hospitality. He said that he and his delegation have had a wonderful time meeting with government officials, industry representatives, and the team at the American Institute in Taiwan. Highlighting that Taiwan has long been a friend and partner of the US, he said their bipartisan delegation to Taiwan emphasizes long-time bipartisan support in the US Congress for Taiwan, and though administrations change, that bipartisan support remains. Chairman Ricketts stated that the US is committed to peace and stability in the Indo-Pacific and that they want to see peace across the Taiwan Strait. He also stated that the US opposes any unilateral change in the status of Taiwan and that they expect any differences between Taiwan and China to be resolved peacefully without coercion or the threat of force. To that end, he said, the US will continue to assist Taiwan in its self-defense and will also step up by bolstering its own defense capabilities, noting that there is broad consensus on this in the US Congress. Chairman Ricketts stated that they want to see Taiwan participate in international organizations and memberships where appropriate, and encourage Taiwan to reach out to current and past diplomatic allies to strengthen those bilateral relationships. He pointed out that the long economic relationship between the US and Taiwan is important for our as well as the entire world’s security and prosperity. He also noted that there are many opportunities for us to continue to grow the economic relationship that will help create more prosperity for our respective peoples and ensure that we are more secure in the world. Chairman Ricketts emphasized that they made this trip early on in the new US administration to work with Taiwan to develop three points: security, diplomatic relations, and the economy. He stated that in the face of rising aggression from communist China, the US will provide commensurate help to Taiwan in self-defense and that they will continue to provide the services and tools needed. In closing, Chairman Ricketts once again thanked President Lai for the hospitality and said he looks forward to dialogue on how we can continue these relationships. Ranking Member Coons then delivered remarks. Mentioning that their delegation also visited the Philippines on this trip, he said that there and in Taiwan, they have been focused on peace, stability, and security, and the ways for deepening and strengthening economic and security relations. He noted that 46 years ago, the US Senate passed the Taiwan Relations Act, adding that it was strongly bipartisan when enacted and that support for it is still strongly bipartisan today. Its core commitment, he said, is that the US will be engaged and will be a partner in ensuring that any dispute or challenge across the strait will be resolved peacefully, and that Taiwan will have the resources it needs for its self-defense. Ranking Member Coons said that between people, friendships are deepest and most enduring when they are based not just on interests but on values, and that the same is true between the US and Taiwan. Free press, free enterprise, free societies, democracy – these core shared values, he said, anchor our friendship and partnership, making them deeper. He remarked that they are grateful for the significant investment in the US being made by companies from Taiwan, but what anchors our partnership, in addition to these important investments and investments being made by Taiwan in its own security, are the values that mobilize our free-enterprise spirit and our commitment to free societies. In Europe in recent years, Ranking Member Coons said, an aggressive nation has tried to change boundaries and change history by force. He said that the US and dozens of countries committed to freedom have come to the aid of Ukraine to defend it, help it stabilize, and secure its future. So too in this region of the world, he added, the US and a bipartisan group in the US Senate are committed to stable, secure, peaceful relations and to deterring any unilateral effort to change the status quo by force. In closing, he said he is grateful for a chance to return to Taiwan after the pandemic and that he looks forward to our conversation, our partnership, and the important work we have in front of us. The delegation was accompanied to the Presidential Office by American Institute in Taiwan Taipei Office Director Raymond Greene.

    Details
    2025-04-17
    President Lai meets New Zealand delegation from All-Party Parliamentary Group on Taiwan  
    On the morning of April 17, President Lai Ching-te met with a delegation from New Zealand’s All-Party Parliamentary Group on Taiwan. In remarks, President Lai thanked the government of New Zealand for reiterating the importance of peace and stability across the Taiwan Strait on multiple occasions since last year. He also stated that this year, the Taiwan-New Zealand economic cooperation agreement (ANZTEC) is being implemented in its complete form. The president expressed hope that deeper collaboration in such fields as smart agriculture, food manufacturing, biomedicine, the digital economy, and clean energy, as well as exchanges among our indigenous peoples, will allow our economies and industries to continue evolving as they adapt to the challenges arising from global changes. A translation of President Lai’s remarks follows: I extend a warm welcome to all of our guests. New Zealand’s All-Party Parliamentary Group on Taiwan was established in 2023, marking a significant milestone in the deepening of Taiwan-New Zealand relations. I would like to thank Members of Parliament Stuart Smith and Tangi Utikere for leading this delegation, and thank all our guests for demonstrating support for Taiwan through action. We currently face a rapidly changing international landscape. Authoritarian regimes continue to converge and expand. Democracies must actively cooperate and jointly safeguard peace, stability, and the prosperous development of the Indo-Pacific region. Since last year, the government of New Zealand has on multiple occasions reiterated the importance of peace and stability across the Taiwan Strait. On behalf of the people of Taiwan, I would like to express our sincere gratitude for these statements and demonstrations of support. This year, ANZTEC is being implemented in its complete form. We look forward to exploring even more diverse markets with New Zealand. Deeper collaboration in such fields as smart agriculture, food manufacturing, biomedicine, the digital economy, and clean energy, as well as exchanges among indigenous peoples, will allow our economies and industries to continue evolving as they adapt to the challenges arising from global changes. Taiwan and New Zealand share the universal values of democracy, freedom, and respect for human rights, and parliamentary diplomacy is a tradition practiced by democracies around the world. Looking ahead, our parliamentary exchanges and mutual visits are bound to become more frequent. This will enable us to explore even more opportunities for cooperation and further deepen and solidify the democratic partnership between Taiwan and New Zealand. Thank you once again for making the long journey to visit us. I wish you a fruitful and successful trip. I also hope that everyone can take time to see more of Taiwan, try our local cuisine, and learn more about our culture. I hope our guests will fall in love with Taiwan. MP Smith then delivered remarks, saying that it is a great pleasure and an honor to be received by President Lai. The MP, noting that President Lai already covered many of the points he planned to make, went on to say that New Zealand and Taiwan share many values. He indicated that both are trading nations that rely on easy access for imports and exports, and that is why freedom of navigation is so important. That is why New Zealand had a naval vessel sail through the Taiwan Strait, he said, to underline the importance of freedom of navigation and our mutual security. MP Smith said that they look forward to building stronger relationships and enhancing the trade between our two nations. He added that New Zealand has much to offer in the field of geothermal energy to assist Taiwan, and mentioned that New Zealand is third largest in terms of the number of rocket launchers for satellites, which could assist Taiwan with communications in the future. New Zealand has other products as well, he said, but looks for assistance from Taiwan’s technology and technological sector. Lastly, MP Smith stated that he looks forward to a long and prosperous relationship between Taiwan and New Zealand. MP Utikere then delivered remarks, indicating that like Taiwan, New Zealand is a nation that is surrounded by ocean, which means that they rely on strong partnerships with communities of interest all around the globe. He said that the all-party parliamentary friendship group that was established and that they are a part of goes a long way in ensuring that a secure relationship between our two parliaments can continue to prosper. The MP also thanked Taiwan’s Representative to New Zealand Joanne Ou (歐江安) and her team for their work, which has ensured the success of the delegation’s visit. He said that the delegation experienced meetings with ministers in Taiwan’s government, members of the legislature, and those from the non-government organization sector as well. He also said that they enjoyed the opportunity to visit Wulai, and that the strength of the connections between the indigenous peoples of Taiwan and the indigenous peoples of Aotearoa New Zealand is something that certainly landed with members of the delegation. MP Utikere noted that he will take up President Lai’s offer on experiencing more of Taiwan, and will spend a few extra days in Tainan, which he understands has a very special place in the president’s heart, adding that he looks forward to his time and experiences there. The MP concluded his remarks by saying that this will be a relationship that continues to go from strength to strength. After their remarks, the New Zealand delegation sang the Māori song “Tutira Mai Nga Iwi” to extend best wishes to Taiwan. Also in attendance at the meeting were New Zealand Members of Parliament Jamie Arbuckle, Greg Fleming, Hamish Campbell, Cameron Luxton, and Helen White.  

    Details
    2025-04-15
    President Lai meets delegation led by Tuvalu Deputy Prime Minister Panapasi Nelesone 
    On the afternoon of April 15, President Lai Ching-te met with a delegation led by Tuvalu Deputy Prime Minister and Minister of Finance and Economic Development Panapasi Nelesone and his wife. In remarks, President Lai thanked Tuvalu for its staunch and long-term backing of Taiwan’s international participation. The president said he looks forward to our nations deepening bilateral ties in such areas as agriculture, medicine, education, and information and communications technology and working together toward greater peace, prosperity, and development in the Pacific region. A translation of President Lai’s remarks follows: I extend a very warm welcome to Deputy Prime Minister Nelesone and Madame Corinna Ituaso Laafai as they lead this delegation to Taiwan. Our distinguished guests are the first delegation from Tuvalu that I have received at the Presidential Office this year. During my visit to Tuvalu last year, I met and exchanged views with Deputy Prime Minister Nelesone and the ministers present. I am delighted to meet you again today and thank you once again for the hospitality you accorded my delegation. The culture of Tuvalu and the warmth of its people are not easily forgotten. Tuvalu’s support for Taiwan has also touched us deeply. I want to take this opportunity to thank Tuvalu for staunchly backing Taiwan’s international participation over the past several decades. Our two countries have supported each other like family and have together made contributions in the international arena. Last Tuesday, I received the credentials of Ambassador Lily Tangisia Faavae and expressed my hope for Taiwan and Tuvalu continuing to deepen bilateral relations. This visit by Deputy Prime Minister Nelesone is an important step in that regard. Our two countries will be signing a labor cooperation agreement and an agreement concerning the recognition of training and certification of seafarers. This will expand bilateral cooperation at multiple levels and bring our relations even closer. Taiwan and Tuvalu are maritime nations and share the values of democracy and freedom. Our two countries have stood shoulder to shoulder to protect marine resources and address the challenges posed by climate change and authoritarianism, and we aspire to work toward greater peace, prosperity, and development in the Pacific region. Our nations have produced fruitful results in such areas as agriculture, medicine, education, and information and communications technology. I anticipate that, with the support of Deputy Prime Minister Nelesone and our distinguished guests, we can continue to employ a more diverse range of strategies to begin a new chapter in our diplomatic partnership. Together, we can make even greater and more concrete contributions to regional development. Deputy Prime Minister Nelesone then delivered remarks, first thanking President Lai for his kind words of welcome and the warm hospitality extended to his delegation. On behalf of the government and people of Tuvalu, he conveyed their gratitude to the president and the people of Taiwan for the generous support, as well as for the enduring friendship we share. He said that Taiwan’s steadfast commitment to our bilateral relationship has been instrumental in advancing our shared values of democracy, resilience, and sustainable development. From vital development assistance to cooperation in health, education, and climate change resilience, he added, Taiwan’s contributions have made a significant impact on the lives of the people of Tuvalu.  For Taiwan’s recent generous donation of shoes for Tuvaluan primary school students, Deputy Prime Minister Nelesone expressed thanks to President Lai. He commented that these gifts, which underscore a deep commitment to the welfare of their youth, transcend mere material support; they are symbols of care, friendship, and hope for the future generations. Noting that our bilateral relationship is built on mutual respect, shared values, and a common vision for sustainable development in the Pacific, he expressed confidence that this partnership will continue to flourish and will serve as a beacon of cooperation and solidarity within our region.  The delegation also included Tuvalu Minister of Foreign Affairs, Labour, and Trade Paulson Panapa; Minister of Public Works, Infrastructure Development and Water Ampelosa Tehulu, and was accompanied to the Presidential Office by Tuvalu Ambassador Faavae.

    Details
    2025-04-10
    President Lai pens Bloomberg News article on Taiwan’s response to US reciprocal tariffs
    On April 10, an article penned by President Lai Ching-te entitled “Taiwan Has a Roadmap for Deeper US Trade Ties” was published by Bloomberg News, explaining to a global audience Taiwan’s strategy on trade with the United States, as well as how Taiwan will engage in dialogue with the aim of removing bilateral trade barriers, increasing investment between Taiwan and the US, and reducing tariffs to zero. The following is the full text of President Lai’s article: Last month, the first of Taiwan’s 66 new F-16Vs rolled off the assembly line in Greenville, South Carolina. Signed during President Donald Trump’s first term, the $8 billion deal stands as a testament to American ingenuity and leadership in advanced manufacturing. Beyond its economic impact – creating thousands of well-paying jobs across the US – it strengthens the foundations of peace and stability in the Indo-Pacific.  This deal is emblematic of the close interests shared between Taiwan and the US. Our bond is forged by an unwavering belief in freedom and liberty. For decades, our two countries have stood shoulder-to-shoulder in deterring communist expansionism. Even as Beijing intensifies its air force and naval exercises in our vicinity, we remain resolute. Taiwan will always be a bastion of democracy and peace in the region. This partnership extends well beyond the security realm. Though home to just 23 million people, Taiwan has in recent years become a significant investor in America. TSMC recently announced it will raise its total investment in the US to $165 billion – an initiative that will create 40,000 construction jobs and tens of thousands more in advanced chip manufacturing and R&D. This investment will bolster the emergence of a new high-tech cluster in Arizona. Taiwan is committed to strengthening bilateral cooperation in manufacturing and innovation. As a trade-dependent economy, our long-term success is built on trade relationships that are fair, reciprocal and mutually beneficial. Encouraging Taiwanese businesses to expand their global footprint, particularly in the US, is a vital part of this strategy. Deepening commercial ties between Taiwanese and American firms is another. These core principles will guide our response to President Trump’s reciprocal tariffs. First, we will seek to restart trade negotiations with a common objective of reducing all tariffs between Taiwan and the US. While Taiwan already maintains low tariffs, with an average nominal rate of 6%, we are willing to further cut this rate to zero on the basis of reciprocity with the US. By removing the last vestiges to free and fair trade, we seek to encourage greater trade and investment flows between our two countries. Second, Taiwan will rapidly expand procurement of American goods. Over the past five years, rising demand for semiconductors and AI-related components has increased our trade surplus. In response to these market trends, Taiwan will seek to narrow the trade imbalance through the procurement of energy, agriculture and other industrial goods from the US. These efforts will create thousands of new jobs across multiple sectors.  We’ll also pursue additional arms procurements that are vital to our self-defense and contribute to peace and stability over the Taiwan Strait. During President Trump’s first term, we secured $18 billion in arms deals, including advanced fighter jets, tanks and anti-ship missiles. Future purchases, which are not reflected in trade balances, build on our economic and security partnership while being essential to Taiwan’s “Peace Through Strength” approach. Third, new investments will be made across the US. Already, Taiwanese firms support 400,000 jobs throughout all 50 states. Beyond TSMC, we also see emerging opportunities in electronics, ICT, energy and petrochemicals. We will establish a cross-agency “US Investment Team” to support bilateral trade and investment – and we hope that efforts will be reciprocated by the Trump administration. Fourth, we are committed to removing non-tariff trade barriers. Taiwan will take concrete steps to resolve persistent issues that have long impeded trade negotiations. And finally, we will strongly address US concerns over export controls and improper transshipment of low-cost goods through Taiwan. These steps form the basis of a comprehensive roadmap for how Taiwan will navigate the shifting trade landscape, transforming challenges in the Taiwan-US economic relationship into new opportunities for growth, resilience and strategic alignment. At a time of growing global uncertainty, underpinned by growing Chinese assertiveness, closer trade ties are more than sound economics; they are a critical pillar of regional security. Our approach is long-term and principled, grounded in a lasting commitment to our friendship with the US, a firm belief in the benefits of fair and reciprocal trade, and an unwavering dedication to peace and stability across the Taiwan Strait. We are confident that our shared economic and security interests will not only overcome turbulence in the international trade environment – they will define the future of a free and open Indo-Pacific.

    Details
    2025-04-06
    President Lai delivers remarks on US tariff policy response
    On April 6, President Lai Ching-te delivered recorded remarks regarding the impact of the 32 percent tariff that the United States government recently imposed on imports from Taiwan in the name of reciprocity. In his remarks, President Lai explained that the government will adopt five response strategies, including making every effort to improve reciprocal tariff rates through negotiations, adopting a support plan for affected domestic industries, adopting medium- and long-term economic development plans, forming new “Taiwan plus the US” arrangements, and launching industry listening tours. The president emphasized that as we face this latest challenge, the government and civil society will work hand in hand, and expressed hope that all parties, both ruling and opposition, will support the measures that the Executive Yuan will take to open up a broader path for Taiwan’s economy. A translation of President Lai’s remarks follows: My fellow citizens, good evening. The US government recently announced higher tariffs on countries around the world in the name of reciprocity, including imposing a 32 percent tariff on imports from Taiwan. This is bound to have a major impact on our nation. Various countries have already responded, and some have even adopted retaliatory measures. Tremendous changes in the global economy are expected. Taiwan is an export-led economy, and in facing future challenges there will inevitably be difficulties, so we must proceed carefully to turn danger into safety. During this time, I want to express gratitude to all sectors of society for providing valuable opinions, which the government regards highly, and will use as a reference to make policy decisions.  However, if we calmly and carefully analyze Taiwan’s trade with the US, we find that last year Taiwan’s exports to the US were valued at US$111.4 billion, accounting for 23.4 percent of total export value, with the other 75-plus percent of products sold worldwide to countries other than the US. Of products sold to the US, competitive ICT products and electronic components accounted for 65.4 percent. This shows that Taiwan’s economy does still have considerable resilience. As long as our response strategies are appropriate, and the public and private sectors join forces, we can reduce impacts. Please do not panic. To address the reciprocal tariffs by the US, Taiwan has no plans to adopt retaliatory tariffs. There will be no change in corporate investment commitments to the US, as long as they are consistent with national interests. But we must ensure the US clearly understands Taiwan’s contributions to US economic development. More importantly, we must actively seek to understand changes in the global economic situation, strengthen Taiwan-US industry cooperation, elevate the status of Taiwan industries in global supply chains, and with safeguarding the continued development of Taiwan’s economy as our goal, adopt the following five strategies to respond. Strategy one: Make every effort to improve reciprocal tariff rates through negotiations using the following five methods:  1. Taiwan has already formed a negotiation team led by Vice Premier Cheng Li-chiun (鄭麗君). The team includes members from the National Security Council, the Office of Trade Negotiations, and relevant Executive Yuan ministries and agencies, as well as academia and industry. Like the US-Mexico-Canada free trade agreement, negotiations on tariffs can start from Taiwan-US bilateral zero-tariff treatment. 2. To expand purchases from the US and thereby reduce the trade deficit, the Executive Yuan has already completed an inventory regarding large-scale procurement plans for agricultural, industrial, petroleum, and natural gas products, and the Ministry of National Defense has also proposed a military procurement list. All procurement plans will be actively pursued. 3. Expand investments in the US. Taiwan’s cumulative investment in the US already exceeds US$100 billion, creating approximately 400,000 jobs. In the future, in addition to increased investment in the US by Taiwan Semiconductor Manufacturing Company, other industries such as electronics, ICT, petrochemicals, and natural gas can all increase their US investments, deepening Taiwan-US industry cooperation. Taiwan’s government has helped form a “Taiwan investment in the US” team, and hopes that the US will reciprocate by forming a “US investment in Taiwan” team to bring about closer Taiwan-US trade cooperation, jointly creating a future economic golden age.  4. We must eliminate non-tariff barriers to trade. Non-tariff barriers are an indicator by which the US assesses whether a trading partner is trading fairly with the US. Therefore, we will proactively resolve longstanding non-tariff barriers so that negotiations can proceed more smoothly. 5. We must resolve two issues that have been matters of longstanding concern to the US. One regards high-tech export controls, and the other regards illegal transshipment of dumped goods, otherwise referred to as “origin washing.” Strategy two: We must adopt a plan for supporting our industries. For industries that will be affected by the tariffs, and especially traditional industries as well as micro-, small-, and medium-sized enterprises, we will provide timely and needed support and assistance. Premier Cho Jung-tai (卓榮泰) and his administrative team recently announced a package of 20 specific measures designed to address nine areas. Moving forward, the support we provide to different industries will depend on how they are affected by the tariffs, will take into account the particular features of each industry, and will help each industry innovate, upgrade, and transform. Strategy three: We must adopt medium- and long-term economic development plans. At this point in time, our government must simultaneously adopt new strategies for economic and industrial development. This is also the fundamental path to solutions for future economic challenges. The government will proactively cooperate with friends and allies, develop a diverse range of markets, and achieve closer integration of entities in the upper, middle, and lower reaches of industrial supply chains. This course of action will make Taiwan’s industrial ecosystem more complete, and will help Taiwanese industries upgrade and transform. We must also make good use of the competitive advantages we possess in such areas as semiconductor manufacturing, integrated chip design, ICT, and smart manufacturing to build Taiwan into an AI island, and promote relevant applications for food, clothing, housing, and transportation, as well as military, security and surveillance, next-generation communications, and the medical and health and wellness industries as we advance toward a smarter, more sustainable, and more prosperous new Taiwan. Strategy four: “Taiwan plus one,” i.e., new “Taiwan plus the US” arrangements: While staying firmly rooted in Taiwan, our enterprises are expanding their global presence and marketing worldwide. This has been our national economic development strategy, and the most important aspect is maintaining a solid base here in Taiwan. We absolutely must maintain a solid footing, and cannot allow the present strife to cause us to waver. Therefore, our government will incentivize investments, carry out deregulation, and continue to improve Taiwan’s investment climate by actively resolving problems involving access to water, electricity, land, human resources, and professional talent. This will enable corporations to stay in Taiwan and continue investing here. In addition, we must also help the overseas manufacturing facilities of offshore Taiwanese businesses to make necessary adjustments to support our “Taiwan plus one” policy, in that our national economic development strategy will be adjusted as follows: to stay firmly rooted in Taiwan while expanding our global presence, strengthening US ties, and marketing worldwide. We intend to make use of the new state of supply chains to strengthen cooperation between Taiwanese and US industries, and gain further access to US markets. Strategy five: Launch industry listening tours: All industrial firms, regardless of sector or size, will be affected to some degree once the US reciprocal tariffs go into effect. The administrative teams led by myself and Premier Cho will hear out industry concerns so that we can quickly resolve problems and make sure policies meet actual needs. My fellow citizens, over the past half-century and more, Taiwan has been through two energy crises, the Asian financial crisis, the global financial crisis, and pandemics. We have been able to not only withstand one test after another, but even turn crises into opportunities. The Taiwanese economy has emerged from these crises stronger and more resilient than ever. As we face this latest challenge, the government and civil society will work hand in hand, and I hope that all parties in the legislature, both ruling and opposition, will support the measures that the Executive Yuan will take to open up a broader path for Taiwan’s economy. Let us join together and give it our all. Thank you.

    MIL OSI Asia Pacific News

  • MIL-OSI: McAdam Included on USA Today’s list of the Best Financial Advisory Firms 2025

    Source: GlobeNewswire (MIL-OSI)

    PHILADELPHIA, April 23, 2025 (GLOBE NEWSWIRE) — McAdam, a national financial services firm headquartered in Philadelphia, has been named on the USA Today list of Best Financial Advisory Firms 2025. This is the third year in a row McAdam has been recognized on the list. This prestigious award is presented by USA Today and Statista Inc., the world-leading statistics portal and industry ranking provider. The awards list was announced on April 23rd, 2025, and can be viewed on USATODAY.COM.

    The Best Financial Advisory Firms 2025 list is awarded to the top registered investment advisory (RIA) firms in the United States based on two dimensions:

    • Recommendations from financial advisors, clients, and industry experts:
      Recommendations were collected via an independent survey among over 30,000 individuals. Clients, industry experts, and financial advisors working for an RIA firm could recommend the RIA firms they find commendable.
    • Development of Assets under Management (AUM):
      Both short-term (12-month) and long-term (5-year) AUM development were analyzed using publicly available data.

    Based on the results of the study, McAdam is pleased to be recognized on USA TODAY’s list of the Best Financial Advisory Firms 2025.

    “Our firm is honored to be included on the national USA Today list of ‘Best Financial Advisory Firms’ for the third time.   The independent survey affirms our company has developed strong lasting relationships in the industry. McAdam advisors and staff each make important contributions in building our brand awareness one client interaction at a time,” said Chief Executive Officer Michael McAdam.     

    Statista publishes hundreds of worldwide industry rankings and company listings with high-profile media partners. This research and analysis service is based on the success of statista.com, the leading data and business intelligence portal that provides statistics, relevant business data, and various market and consumer studies and surveys.

    About McAdam LLC.

    Founded in 2008, McAdam Financial is a nationally recognized independent financial advisory firm. Its Philadelphia headquarters leads a nationwide network of fiduciary financial advisors operating in Boston, Chicago, and Tysons Corner. The firm is dedicated to helping clients achieve their financial goals through a comprehensive approach that includes retirement planning, 401(k) optimization, tax and insurance analysis, investment planning, education planning, estate planning, and employer benefits optimization. McAdam Financial provides specialized strategies to grow, sustain, and protect wealth, helping enable clients to enjoy a secure and fulfilling retirement.

    Important Disclosures

    Awards, rankings, ratings, and/or recognition by unaffiliated rating services and/or publications are not indicative of McAdam’s future performance, should not be construed by a client or prospective client as a guarantee that such client will experience a certain level of results if McAdam is engaged, or continues to be engaged to provide investment advisory services, nor should they be construed as a current or past endorsement of McAdam by any of its clients.

    Rankings published by magazines, and others, generally base their selections exclusively on information prepared and/or submitted by the recognized adviser. Such awards, rankings, ratings, and/or recognition are no guarantee of future investment success. Working with a highly rated advisor does not ensure that a client or prospective client will experience a higher level of performance. Generally, rankings are based on information prepared and submitted by the adviser.

    The awards listed do not require memberships or payment for consideration. By virtue of disclosing an award ranking, McAdam is disclosing favorable ratings (to the extent that McAdam is ranked above other advisors) and unfavorable ratings (to the extent that McAdam is ranked below other advisors). The awards and rankings are independently granted. McAdam is not affiliated with the awarding rating services or and/or publications listed.

    Securities offered only by duly registered individuals through Madison Avenue Securities, LLC (MAS), member FINRA/SIPC. Investment advisory services offered only by duly registered individuals of McAdam, LLC, a registered investment advisor. Insurance products and services offered through McAdam Financial. McAdam, LLC and McAdam Financial are not affiliated with MAS.

    Contact:
    Kevin McAdam, CFA
    P: (203) 912-2779
    Email: Kevin@McAdamFA.com

    The MIL Network

  • MIL-OSI: MEXC Strengthens Reserve Backing with $390M Asset Increase

    Source: GlobeNewswire (MIL-OSI)

    VICTORIA, Seychelles, April 23, 2025 (GLOBE NEWSWIRE) — MEXC, a leading global cryptocurrency exchange, has significantly bolstered its reserve holdings, reporting an increase of approximately $389 million in total asset value over the past two months (as of April 21, 2025). The latest audit of MEXC’s Proof of Reserves confirms that all major cryptocurrencies are backed by reserves exceeding 100%, underscoring the exchange’s strong liquidity position and commitment to financial transparency.

    Reserve Ratio Update Reflects Strong Growth

    As of April 2025, MEXC’s reserve ratios continue to demonstrate solid coverage across all major cryptocurrencies:

    The updated reserve ratios highlight consistent over-collateralization, reinforcing user confidence in the platform’s ability to meet withdrawal demands at any time.

    Substantial Asset Growth Over Two Months

    A comparison between February and April 2025 reveals a notable surge in MEXC’s asset holdings, with total on-chain reserves increasing by approximately $389.1 million:

    The sharp rise signals robust capital inflows during this two-month period.

    Strong Capital Inflow Signals Growing Market Confidence

    The substantial increase in our reserves over the past two months reflects growing confidence in MEXC’s platform during recent market conditions,” said Tracy Jin, COO of MEXC. “With nearly $390 million in added value to our reserves, we’re not just maintaining our commitment to user security—we’re strengthening it.

    The latest data shows notable growth in Bitcoin and Ethereum holdings, with reserves increasing by 1,649.72 BTC and 21,264.46 ETH, respectively. At current market prices, these additions represent over $179 million in combined value, underscoring rising user activity and capital inflow.

    Commitment to Transparency and Security

    MEXC continues to conduct bi-monthly Proof of Reserve audits as part of its broader commitment to transparency and user trust. These regular reports allow users to independently verify that their assets are fully backed on-chain, with the latest audit confirming near-zero discrepancies between public blockchain data and platform records.

    Transparency isn’t just a policy at MEXC—it’s a fundamental principle guiding our operations,” added Tracy Jin. “By publishing these comprehensive reserve reports every two months, we ensure our users have full visibility into the security of their assets.

    Multi-layered Security Framework

    MEXC safeguards user assets through a comprehensive security architecture that includes:

    1. 100%+ Reserve Backing: All user assets are fully backed with reserves exceeding total deposits
    2. Insurance Fund: Provides protection against extreme market volatility
    3. Regular Audits: Bi-monthly verification ensures continued compliance and transparency
    4. Cold Wallet Storage: The majority of user funds are held in offline, secure cold wallets to prevent unauthorized access

    The Go-To Platform for Seamless Crypto Trading

    In addition to implementing robust safety measures to ensure a secure trading environment, the platform offers a variety of features and services designed to enhance the user experience. These features help traders minimize costs and maximize returns. MEXC is committed to empowering traders by enabling investments across the widest range of assets, ensuring safe and seamless transactions regardless of market conditions.

    • M – Most Trending Tokens: MEXC is known for its rapid token listings and diverse selection of popular tokens, helping users capitalize on emerging opportunities. To date, over 3,000 tokens have been listed on the platform.
    • E – Everyday Airdrops: MEXC makes it easy for users to engage in daily airdrop events and receive substantial rewards without complex procedures. In 2024, the platform completed 2,293 airdrop events, distributing over $136 million in rewards.
    • X – Xtremely Low Fees: MEXC offers highly competitive trading fees, helping users reduce costs and maximize their growth potential.
    • C – Comprehensive Liquidity: Backed by strong liquidity and market depth, MEXC ensures the efficient and seamless execution of every transaction, minimizing slippage even during volatile conditions.

    These features have helped MEXC attract over 36 million users, establishing it as the platform of choice for an increasing number of traders around the world.

    About MEXC

    Founded in 2018, MEXC is committed to being “Your Easiest Way to Crypto”. Serving over 36 million users across 170+ countries, MEXC is known for its broad selection of trending tokens, frequent airdrop opportunities, and low trading fees. Our user-friendly platform is designed to support both new traders and experienced investors, offering secure and efficient access to digital assets. MEXC prioritizes simplicity and innovation, making crypto trading more accessible and rewarding.
    MEXC Official WebsiteXTelegramHow to Sign Up on MEXC

    Risk Disclaimer:
    The information provided in this article about cryptocurrencies does not represent MEXC’s official stance or investment advice. Given the highly volatile nature of the cryptocurrency market, investors are encouraged to carefully evaluate market fluctuations, project fundamentals, and potential financial risks before making any trading decisions.

    Source

    Contact:
    MEXC PR Manager
    Lucia Hu: lucia.hu@mexc.com

    Disclaimer: This press release is provided by the MEXC. The statements, views, and opinions expressed in this content are solely those of the content provider and do not necessarily reflect the views of this media platform or its publisher. We do not endorse, verify, or guarantee the accuracy, completeness, or reliability of any information presented. We do not guarantee any claims, statements, or promises made in this article. This content is for informational purposes only and should not be considered financial, investment, or trading advice.
    Investing in crypto and mining-related opportunities involves significant risks, including the potential loss of capital. It is possible to lose all your capital. These products may not be suitable for everyone, and you should ensure that you understand the risks involved. Seek independent advice if necessary. Speculate only with funds that you can afford to lose. Readers are strongly encouraged to conduct their own research and consult with a qualified financial advisor before making any investment decisions. However, due to the inherently speculative nature of the blockchain sector—including cryptocurrency, NFTs, and mining—complete accuracy cannot always be guaranteed.
    Neither the media platform nor the publisher shall be held responsible for any fraudulent activities, misrepresentations, or financial losses arising from the content of this press release. In the event of any legal claims or charges against this article, we accept no liability or responsibility.

    Legal Disclaimer: This media platform provides the content of this article on an “as-is” basis, without any warranties or representations of any kind, express or implied. We assume no responsibility for any inaccuracies, errors, or omissions. We do not assume any responsibility or liability for the accuracy, content, images, videos, licenses, completeness, legality, or reliability of the information presented herein. Any concerns, complaints, or copyright issues related to this article should be directed to the content provider mentioned above.

    Photos accompanying this announcement are available at:

    https://www.globenewswire.com/NewsRoom/AttachmentNg/e343cb19-8b52-40dc-93ab-776af685a056

    https://www.globenewswire.com/NewsRoom/AttachmentNg/ff1af87e-d789-4c89-8c2c-883b5a180aef

    https://www.globenewswire.com/NewsRoom/AttachmentNg/41b23578-4744-452c-aaf1-845c4483be4a

    The MIL Network

  • MIL-OSI Asia-Pac: President Lai meets US CNAS NextGen fellows

    Source: Republic of China Taiwan

    Details
    2025-04-18
    President Lai meets US delegation from Senate Foreign Relations Subcommittee on East Asia and the Pacific
    On the afternoon of April 18, President Lai Ching-te met with a delegation led by Senator Pete Ricketts, chairman of the United States Senate Foreign Relations Subcommittee on East Asia, the Pacific, and International Cybersecurity Policy. In remarks, President Lai said we hope to promote our Taiwan plus one policy, that is, new industrial arrangements for Taiwan plus the US, to leverage the strengths of both sides and reinforce our links in such areas as the economy, trade, and technological innovation. The president said that by deepening cooperation, Taiwan and the US will be better positioned to work together on building non-red supply chains. He said a more secure and sustainable economic and trade partnership will allow us to address the challenges posed by geopolitics, climate change, and the restructuring of global supply chains. A translation of President Lai’s remarks follows: I warmly welcome you all to Taiwan. I want to take this opportunity to especially thank Chairman Pete Ricketts and Ranking Member Chris Coons for their high regard and support for Taiwan. Chairman Ricketts has elected to visit Taiwan on his first overseas trip since taking up his new position in January. Ranking Member Coons made a dedicated trip to Taiwan in 2021 to announce a donation of COVID-19 vaccines on behalf of the US government. He also visited last May, soon after my inauguration, continuing to deepen Taiwan-US exchanges. Thanks to support from Chairman Ricketts and Ranking Member Coons, the US Congress has continued to introduce many concrete initiatives and resources to assist Taiwan through the National Defense Authorization Act and Consolidated Appropriations Act, bringing the Taiwan-US partnership even closer. For this, I want to again express my gratitude. There has long been bipartisan support in the US Congress for maintaining security in the Taiwan Strait. Faced with China’s persistent political and military intimidation, Taiwan will endeavor to reform national defense and enhance whole-of-society defense resilience. We will also make special budget allocations to ensure that our defense budget exceeds 3 percent of GDP, up from the current 2.5 percent, so as to enhance Taiwan’s self-defense capabilities. We look forward to Taiwan and the US continuing to work together to maintain peace and stability in the region. We will also promote our Taiwan plus one policy, that is, new industrial arrangements for Taiwan plus the US. We hope to leverage the strengths of both sides and reinforce our links in such areas as the economy, trade, and technological innovation, jointly promoting prosperity and development. We believe that by deepening cooperation through the Taiwan plus one policy, Taiwan and the US will be better positioned to work together on building non-red supply chains. A more secure and sustainable economic and trade partnership will allow us to address the challenges posed by geopolitics, climate change, and the restructuring of global supply chains. In closing, I wish Chairman Ricketts and Ranking Member Coons a smooth and successful visit. Chairman Ricketts then delivered remarks, first thanking President Lai for his hospitality. He said that he and his delegation have had a wonderful time meeting with government officials, industry representatives, and the team at the American Institute in Taiwan. Highlighting that Taiwan has long been a friend and partner of the US, he said their bipartisan delegation to Taiwan emphasizes long-time bipartisan support in the US Congress for Taiwan, and though administrations change, that bipartisan support remains. Chairman Ricketts stated that the US is committed to peace and stability in the Indo-Pacific and that they want to see peace across the Taiwan Strait. He also stated that the US opposes any unilateral change in the status of Taiwan and that they expect any differences between Taiwan and China to be resolved peacefully without coercion or the threat of force. To that end, he said, the US will continue to assist Taiwan in its self-defense and will also step up by bolstering its own defense capabilities, noting that there is broad consensus on this in the US Congress. Chairman Ricketts stated that they want to see Taiwan participate in international organizations and memberships where appropriate, and encourage Taiwan to reach out to current and past diplomatic allies to strengthen those bilateral relationships. He pointed out that the long economic relationship between the US and Taiwan is important for our as well as the entire world’s security and prosperity. He also noted that there are many opportunities for us to continue to grow the economic relationship that will help create more prosperity for our respective peoples and ensure that we are more secure in the world. Chairman Ricketts emphasized that they made this trip early on in the new US administration to work with Taiwan to develop three points: security, diplomatic relations, and the economy. He stated that in the face of rising aggression from communist China, the US will provide commensurate help to Taiwan in self-defense and that they will continue to provide the services and tools needed. In closing, Chairman Ricketts once again thanked President Lai for the hospitality and said he looks forward to dialogue on how we can continue these relationships. Ranking Member Coons then delivered remarks. Mentioning that their delegation also visited the Philippines on this trip, he said that there and in Taiwan, they have been focused on peace, stability, and security, and the ways for deepening and strengthening economic and security relations. He noted that 46 years ago, the US Senate passed the Taiwan Relations Act, adding that it was strongly bipartisan when enacted and that support for it is still strongly bipartisan today. Its core commitment, he said, is that the US will be engaged and will be a partner in ensuring that any dispute or challenge across the strait will be resolved peacefully, and that Taiwan will have the resources it needs for its self-defense. Ranking Member Coons said that between people, friendships are deepest and most enduring when they are based not just on interests but on values, and that the same is true between the US and Taiwan. Free press, free enterprise, free societies, democracy – these core shared values, he said, anchor our friendship and partnership, making them deeper. He remarked that they are grateful for the significant investment in the US being made by companies from Taiwan, but what anchors our partnership, in addition to these important investments and investments being made by Taiwan in its own security, are the values that mobilize our free-enterprise spirit and our commitment to free societies. In Europe in recent years, Ranking Member Coons said, an aggressive nation has tried to change boundaries and change history by force. He said that the US and dozens of countries committed to freedom have come to the aid of Ukraine to defend it, help it stabilize, and secure its future. So too in this region of the world, he added, the US and a bipartisan group in the US Senate are committed to stable, secure, peaceful relations and to deterring any unilateral effort to change the status quo by force. In closing, he said he is grateful for a chance to return to Taiwan after the pandemic and that he looks forward to our conversation, our partnership, and the important work we have in front of us. The delegation was accompanied to the Presidential Office by American Institute in Taiwan Taipei Office Director Raymond Greene.

    Details
    2025-04-17
    President Lai meets New Zealand delegation from All-Party Parliamentary Group on Taiwan  
    On the morning of April 17, President Lai Ching-te met with a delegation from New Zealand’s All-Party Parliamentary Group on Taiwan. In remarks, President Lai thanked the government of New Zealand for reiterating the importance of peace and stability across the Taiwan Strait on multiple occasions since last year. He also stated that this year, the Taiwan-New Zealand economic cooperation agreement (ANZTEC) is being implemented in its complete form. The president expressed hope that deeper collaboration in such fields as smart agriculture, food manufacturing, biomedicine, the digital economy, and clean energy, as well as exchanges among our indigenous peoples, will allow our economies and industries to continue evolving as they adapt to the challenges arising from global changes. A translation of President Lai’s remarks follows: I extend a warm welcome to all of our guests. New Zealand’s All-Party Parliamentary Group on Taiwan was established in 2023, marking a significant milestone in the deepening of Taiwan-New Zealand relations. I would like to thank Members of Parliament Stuart Smith and Tangi Utikere for leading this delegation, and thank all our guests for demonstrating support for Taiwan through action. We currently face a rapidly changing international landscape. Authoritarian regimes continue to converge and expand. Democracies must actively cooperate and jointly safeguard peace, stability, and the prosperous development of the Indo-Pacific region. Since last year, the government of New Zealand has on multiple occasions reiterated the importance of peace and stability across the Taiwan Strait. On behalf of the people of Taiwan, I would like to express our sincere gratitude for these statements and demonstrations of support. This year, ANZTEC is being implemented in its complete form. We look forward to exploring even more diverse markets with New Zealand. Deeper collaboration in such fields as smart agriculture, food manufacturing, biomedicine, the digital economy, and clean energy, as well as exchanges among indigenous peoples, will allow our economies and industries to continue evolving as they adapt to the challenges arising from global changes. Taiwan and New Zealand share the universal values of democracy, freedom, and respect for human rights, and parliamentary diplomacy is a tradition practiced by democracies around the world. Looking ahead, our parliamentary exchanges and mutual visits are bound to become more frequent. This will enable us to explore even more opportunities for cooperation and further deepen and solidify the democratic partnership between Taiwan and New Zealand. Thank you once again for making the long journey to visit us. I wish you a fruitful and successful trip. I also hope that everyone can take time to see more of Taiwan, try our local cuisine, and learn more about our culture. I hope our guests will fall in love with Taiwan. MP Smith then delivered remarks, saying that it is a great pleasure and an honor to be received by President Lai. The MP, noting that President Lai already covered many of the points he planned to make, went on to say that New Zealand and Taiwan share many values. He indicated that both are trading nations that rely on easy access for imports and exports, and that is why freedom of navigation is so important. That is why New Zealand had a naval vessel sail through the Taiwan Strait, he said, to underline the importance of freedom of navigation and our mutual security. MP Smith said that they look forward to building stronger relationships and enhancing the trade between our two nations. He added that New Zealand has much to offer in the field of geothermal energy to assist Taiwan, and mentioned that New Zealand is third largest in terms of the number of rocket launchers for satellites, which could assist Taiwan with communications in the future. New Zealand has other products as well, he said, but looks for assistance from Taiwan’s technology and technological sector. Lastly, MP Smith stated that he looks forward to a long and prosperous relationship between Taiwan and New Zealand. MP Utikere then delivered remarks, indicating that like Taiwan, New Zealand is a nation that is surrounded by ocean, which means that they rely on strong partnerships with communities of interest all around the globe. He said that the all-party parliamentary friendship group that was established and that they are a part of goes a long way in ensuring that a secure relationship between our two parliaments can continue to prosper. The MP also thanked Taiwan’s Representative to New Zealand Joanne Ou (歐江安) and her team for their work, which has ensured the success of the delegation’s visit. He said that the delegation experienced meetings with ministers in Taiwan’s government, members of the legislature, and those from the non-government organization sector as well. He also said that they enjoyed the opportunity to visit Wulai, and that the strength of the connections between the indigenous peoples of Taiwan and the indigenous peoples of Aotearoa New Zealand is something that certainly landed with members of the delegation. MP Utikere noted that he will take up President Lai’s offer on experiencing more of Taiwan, and will spend a few extra days in Tainan, which he understands has a very special place in the president’s heart, adding that he looks forward to his time and experiences there. The MP concluded his remarks by saying that this will be a relationship that continues to go from strength to strength. After their remarks, the New Zealand delegation sang the Māori song “Tutira Mai Nga Iwi” to extend best wishes to Taiwan. Also in attendance at the meeting were New Zealand Members of Parliament Jamie Arbuckle, Greg Fleming, Hamish Campbell, Cameron Luxton, and Helen White.  

    Details
    2025-04-15
    President Lai meets delegation led by Tuvalu Deputy Prime Minister Panapasi Nelesone 
    On the afternoon of April 15, President Lai Ching-te met with a delegation led by Tuvalu Deputy Prime Minister and Minister of Finance and Economic Development Panapasi Nelesone and his wife. In remarks, President Lai thanked Tuvalu for its staunch and long-term backing of Taiwan’s international participation. The president said he looks forward to our nations deepening bilateral ties in such areas as agriculture, medicine, education, and information and communications technology and working together toward greater peace, prosperity, and development in the Pacific region. A translation of President Lai’s remarks follows: I extend a very warm welcome to Deputy Prime Minister Nelesone and Madame Corinna Ituaso Laafai as they lead this delegation to Taiwan. Our distinguished guests are the first delegation from Tuvalu that I have received at the Presidential Office this year. During my visit to Tuvalu last year, I met and exchanged views with Deputy Prime Minister Nelesone and the ministers present. I am delighted to meet you again today and thank you once again for the hospitality you accorded my delegation. The culture of Tuvalu and the warmth of its people are not easily forgotten. Tuvalu’s support for Taiwan has also touched us deeply. I want to take this opportunity to thank Tuvalu for staunchly backing Taiwan’s international participation over the past several decades. Our two countries have supported each other like family and have together made contributions in the international arena. Last Tuesday, I received the credentials of Ambassador Lily Tangisia Faavae and expressed my hope for Taiwan and Tuvalu continuing to deepen bilateral relations. This visit by Deputy Prime Minister Nelesone is an important step in that regard. Our two countries will be signing a labor cooperation agreement and an agreement concerning the recognition of training and certification of seafarers. This will expand bilateral cooperation at multiple levels and bring our relations even closer. Taiwan and Tuvalu are maritime nations and share the values of democracy and freedom. Our two countries have stood shoulder to shoulder to protect marine resources and address the challenges posed by climate change and authoritarianism, and we aspire to work toward greater peace, prosperity, and development in the Pacific region. Our nations have produced fruitful results in such areas as agriculture, medicine, education, and information and communications technology. I anticipate that, with the support of Deputy Prime Minister Nelesone and our distinguished guests, we can continue to employ a more diverse range of strategies to begin a new chapter in our diplomatic partnership. Together, we can make even greater and more concrete contributions to regional development. Deputy Prime Minister Nelesone then delivered remarks, first thanking President Lai for his kind words of welcome and the warm hospitality extended to his delegation. On behalf of the government and people of Tuvalu, he conveyed their gratitude to the president and the people of Taiwan for the generous support, as well as for the enduring friendship we share. He said that Taiwan’s steadfast commitment to our bilateral relationship has been instrumental in advancing our shared values of democracy, resilience, and sustainable development. From vital development assistance to cooperation in health, education, and climate change resilience, he added, Taiwan’s contributions have made a significant impact on the lives of the people of Tuvalu.  For Taiwan’s recent generous donation of shoes for Tuvaluan primary school students, Deputy Prime Minister Nelesone expressed thanks to President Lai. He commented that these gifts, which underscore a deep commitment to the welfare of their youth, transcend mere material support; they are symbols of care, friendship, and hope for the future generations. Noting that our bilateral relationship is built on mutual respect, shared values, and a common vision for sustainable development in the Pacific, he expressed confidence that this partnership will continue to flourish and will serve as a beacon of cooperation and solidarity within our region.  The delegation also included Tuvalu Minister of Foreign Affairs, Labour, and Trade Paulson Panapa; Minister of Public Works, Infrastructure Development and Water Ampelosa Tehulu, and was accompanied to the Presidential Office by Tuvalu Ambassador Faavae.

    Details
    2025-04-10
    President Lai pens Bloomberg News article on Taiwan’s response to US reciprocal tariffs
    On April 10, an article penned by President Lai Ching-te entitled “Taiwan Has a Roadmap for Deeper US Trade Ties” was published by Bloomberg News, explaining to a global audience Taiwan’s strategy on trade with the United States, as well as how Taiwan will engage in dialogue with the aim of removing bilateral trade barriers, increasing investment between Taiwan and the US, and reducing tariffs to zero. The following is the full text of President Lai’s article: Last month, the first of Taiwan’s 66 new F-16Vs rolled off the assembly line in Greenville, South Carolina. Signed during President Donald Trump’s first term, the $8 billion deal stands as a testament to American ingenuity and leadership in advanced manufacturing. Beyond its economic impact – creating thousands of well-paying jobs across the US – it strengthens the foundations of peace and stability in the Indo-Pacific.  This deal is emblematic of the close interests shared between Taiwan and the US. Our bond is forged by an unwavering belief in freedom and liberty. For decades, our two countries have stood shoulder-to-shoulder in deterring communist expansionism. Even as Beijing intensifies its air force and naval exercises in our vicinity, we remain resolute. Taiwan will always be a bastion of democracy and peace in the region. This partnership extends well beyond the security realm. Though home to just 23 million people, Taiwan has in recent years become a significant investor in America. TSMC recently announced it will raise its total investment in the US to $165 billion – an initiative that will create 40,000 construction jobs and tens of thousands more in advanced chip manufacturing and R&D. This investment will bolster the emergence of a new high-tech cluster in Arizona. Taiwan is committed to strengthening bilateral cooperation in manufacturing and innovation. As a trade-dependent economy, our long-term success is built on trade relationships that are fair, reciprocal and mutually beneficial. Encouraging Taiwanese businesses to expand their global footprint, particularly in the US, is a vital part of this strategy. Deepening commercial ties between Taiwanese and American firms is another. These core principles will guide our response to President Trump’s reciprocal tariffs. First, we will seek to restart trade negotiations with a common objective of reducing all tariffs between Taiwan and the US. While Taiwan already maintains low tariffs, with an average nominal rate of 6%, we are willing to further cut this rate to zero on the basis of reciprocity with the US. By removing the last vestiges to free and fair trade, we seek to encourage greater trade and investment flows between our two countries. Second, Taiwan will rapidly expand procurement of American goods. Over the past five years, rising demand for semiconductors and AI-related components has increased our trade surplus. In response to these market trends, Taiwan will seek to narrow the trade imbalance through the procurement of energy, agriculture and other industrial goods from the US. These efforts will create thousands of new jobs across multiple sectors.  We’ll also pursue additional arms procurements that are vital to our self-defense and contribute to peace and stability over the Taiwan Strait. During President Trump’s first term, we secured $18 billion in arms deals, including advanced fighter jets, tanks and anti-ship missiles. Future purchases, which are not reflected in trade balances, build on our economic and security partnership while being essential to Taiwan’s “Peace Through Strength” approach. Third, new investments will be made across the US. Already, Taiwanese firms support 400,000 jobs throughout all 50 states. Beyond TSMC, we also see emerging opportunities in electronics, ICT, energy and petrochemicals. We will establish a cross-agency “US Investment Team” to support bilateral trade and investment – and we hope that efforts will be reciprocated by the Trump administration. Fourth, we are committed to removing non-tariff trade barriers. Taiwan will take concrete steps to resolve persistent issues that have long impeded trade negotiations. And finally, we will strongly address US concerns over export controls and improper transshipment of low-cost goods through Taiwan. These steps form the basis of a comprehensive roadmap for how Taiwan will navigate the shifting trade landscape, transforming challenges in the Taiwan-US economic relationship into new opportunities for growth, resilience and strategic alignment. At a time of growing global uncertainty, underpinned by growing Chinese assertiveness, closer trade ties are more than sound economics; they are a critical pillar of regional security. Our approach is long-term and principled, grounded in a lasting commitment to our friendship with the US, a firm belief in the benefits of fair and reciprocal trade, and an unwavering dedication to peace and stability across the Taiwan Strait. We are confident that our shared economic and security interests will not only overcome turbulence in the international trade environment – they will define the future of a free and open Indo-Pacific.

    Details
    2025-04-08
    President Lai receives credentials from new Tuvalu Ambassador Lily Tangisia Faavae  
    On the morning of April 8, President Lai Ching-te received the credentials of new Ambassador Extraordinary and Plenipotentiary of Tuvalu to the Republic of China (Taiwan) Lily Tangisia Faavae. In remarks, President Lai welcomed the ambassador to her new post and thanked Tuvalu for its long-term support for Taiwan’s international participation. The president also noted that joint efforts between our two countries have produced fruitful results in such areas as medicine and public health, agricultural and fisheries technology, and information and communications technology. He expressed his hope that we will continue to deepen our bilateral relations so as to generate even greater well-being for our peoples and promote peace, stability, and prosperity in the Pacific region. A translation of President Lai’s remarks follows: It is a great pleasure today to receive the credentials of Ambassador Extraordinary and Plenipotentiary of Tuvalu Lily Tangisia Faavae. On behalf of the Republic of China (Taiwan), I extend my warmest welcome to you. Last year, the Republic of China (Taiwan) and Tuvalu celebrated 45 years of diplomatic relations. Prime Minister Feleti Teo visited Taiwan in May last year for the inauguration of myself and Vice President Bi-khim Hsiao and again in October for our National Day celebrations. When I visited Tuvalu last December, I was warmly received by the government and people of Tuvalu, and I deeply felt that our two countries were like family. Ambassador Faavae’s posting to Taiwan demonstrates the importance Prime Minister Teo places on our ties. Widely recognized for her exceptional talent, Ambassador Faavae is an outstanding official with extensive experience in public service. Moreover, during her term as Permanent Secretary of the Ministry of Health and Social Welfare, she voiced support for Taiwan at the World Health Assembly. I believe that with her assistance, our two nations will further advance cooperation and exchanges. I want to thank the government of Tuvalu for long supporting Taiwan’s international participation. Furthermore, joint efforts between our two countries have produced fruitful results in such areas as medicine and public health, agricultural and fisheries technology, and information and communications technology. Last year, Prime Minister Teo and I signed a joint communiqué on advancing the comprehensive partnership between Taiwan and Tuvalu. Going forward, we will stand together in tackling the challenges we face, including climate change and expanding authoritarianism. And we will continue to deepen our bilateral relations so as to generate even greater well-being for our peoples and promote peace, stability, and prosperity in the Pacific region. Once again, I warmly welcome Ambassador Faavae to her new post in Taiwan. Please convey warmest regards from Taiwan to Prime Minister Teo and all of our friends in Tuvalu. I wish you all the best in work and life during your term in Taiwan. Ambassador Faavae then delivered remarks, saying that it is a great honor and privilege to meet with President Lai today as the new Ambassador Extraordinary and Plenipotentiary of Tuvalu to Taiwan, and to present to him her letter of credence. She then extended, on behalf of the government and people of Tuvalu, her warmest greetings and deep respect to the president and people of Taiwan. The letter of credence, she noted, signifies the trust and confidence that her government and governor-general have placed in her to represent their nation and to foster and strengthen the bonds of friendship and cooperation between our countries. Ambassador Faavae said that our two countries have enjoyed a longstanding relationship of 45 years based on mutual respect, cooperation, and shared values. She added that we have collaborated, and continue to do so, in such fields as education, health, climate change adaptation and sea level rise mitigation, agriculture, clean energy, and internet connectivity.  Ambassador Faavae pointed out that Tuvalu remains committed to deepening ties with Taiwan and that it values people-to-people connections and our shared Austronesian heritage. She noted that the people of Tuvalu, a small developing nation, have greatly benefited from Taiwan’s advanced technical expertise and diverse financial assistance. She said she believes Tuvalu and Taiwan share a common interest and are united in our efforts and commitment to upholding democracy, peace, stability, and prosperity for our people and making the world better and safer.  Ambassador Faavae stated that as ambassador of Tuvalu to Taiwan, she pledges to work diligently and respectfully to enhance our bilateral relations, promote mutual understanding, and facilitate collaboration in areas of shared concern. The ambassador said she looks forward to collaborating closely with the Taiwan government and other stakeholders to achieve our common objectives and to continue building a more prosperous and harmonious future for our nations. In closing, she thanked President Lai for the opportunity to serve and to further the enduring friendship between our two countries.  

    Details
    2025-04-06
    President Lai delivers remarks on US tariff policy response
    On April 6, President Lai Ching-te delivered recorded remarks regarding the impact of the 32 percent tariff that the United States government recently imposed on imports from Taiwan in the name of reciprocity. In his remarks, President Lai explained that the government will adopt five response strategies, including making every effort to improve reciprocal tariff rates through negotiations, adopting a support plan for affected domestic industries, adopting medium- and long-term economic development plans, forming new “Taiwan plus the US” arrangements, and launching industry listening tours. The president emphasized that as we face this latest challenge, the government and civil society will work hand in hand, and expressed hope that all parties, both ruling and opposition, will support the measures that the Executive Yuan will take to open up a broader path for Taiwan’s economy. A translation of President Lai’s remarks follows: My fellow citizens, good evening. The US government recently announced higher tariffs on countries around the world in the name of reciprocity, including imposing a 32 percent tariff on imports from Taiwan. This is bound to have a major impact on our nation. Various countries have already responded, and some have even adopted retaliatory measures. Tremendous changes in the global economy are expected. Taiwan is an export-led economy, and in facing future challenges there will inevitably be difficulties, so we must proceed carefully to turn danger into safety. During this time, I want to express gratitude to all sectors of society for providing valuable opinions, which the government regards highly, and will use as a reference to make policy decisions.  However, if we calmly and carefully analyze Taiwan’s trade with the US, we find that last year Taiwan’s exports to the US were valued at US$111.4 billion, accounting for 23.4 percent of total export value, with the other 75-plus percent of products sold worldwide to countries other than the US. Of products sold to the US, competitive ICT products and electronic components accounted for 65.4 percent. This shows that Taiwan’s economy does still have considerable resilience. As long as our response strategies are appropriate, and the public and private sectors join forces, we can reduce impacts. Please do not panic. To address the reciprocal tariffs by the US, Taiwan has no plans to adopt retaliatory tariffs. There will be no change in corporate investment commitments to the US, as long as they are consistent with national interests. But we must ensure the US clearly understands Taiwan’s contributions to US economic development. More importantly, we must actively seek to understand changes in the global economic situation, strengthen Taiwan-US industry cooperation, elevate the status of Taiwan industries in global supply chains, and with safeguarding the continued development of Taiwan’s economy as our goal, adopt the following five strategies to respond. Strategy one: Make every effort to improve reciprocal tariff rates through negotiations using the following five methods:  1. Taiwan has already formed a negotiation team led by Vice Premier Cheng Li-chiun (鄭麗君). The team includes members from the National Security Council, the Office of Trade Negotiations, and relevant Executive Yuan ministries and agencies, as well as academia and industry. Like the US-Mexico-Canada free trade agreement, negotiations on tariffs can start from Taiwan-US bilateral zero-tariff treatment. 2. To expand purchases from the US and thereby reduce the trade deficit, the Executive Yuan has already completed an inventory regarding large-scale procurement plans for agricultural, industrial, petroleum, and natural gas products, and the Ministry of National Defense has also proposed a military procurement list. All procurement plans will be actively pursued. 3. Expand investments in the US. Taiwan’s cumulative investment in the US already exceeds US$100 billion, creating approximately 400,000 jobs. In the future, in addition to increased investment in the US by Taiwan Semiconductor Manufacturing Company, other industries such as electronics, ICT, petrochemicals, and natural gas can all increase their US investments, deepening Taiwan-US industry cooperation. Taiwan’s government has helped form a “Taiwan investment in the US” team, and hopes that the US will reciprocate by forming a “US investment in Taiwan” team to bring about closer Taiwan-US trade cooperation, jointly creating a future economic golden age.  4. We must eliminate non-tariff barriers to trade. Non-tariff barriers are an indicator by which the US assesses whether a trading partner is trading fairly with the US. Therefore, we will proactively resolve longstanding non-tariff barriers so that negotiations can proceed more smoothly. 5. We must resolve two issues that have been matters of longstanding concern to the US. One regards high-tech export controls, and the other regards illegal transshipment of dumped goods, otherwise referred to as “origin washing.” Strategy two: We must adopt a plan for supporting our industries. For industries that will be affected by the tariffs, and especially traditional industries as well as micro-, small-, and medium-sized enterprises, we will provide timely and needed support and assistance. Premier Cho Jung-tai (卓榮泰) and his administrative team recently announced a package of 20 specific measures designed to address nine areas. Moving forward, the support we provide to different industries will depend on how they are affected by the tariffs, will take into account the particular features of each industry, and will help each industry innovate, upgrade, and transform. Strategy three: We must adopt medium- and long-term economic development plans. At this point in time, our government must simultaneously adopt new strategies for economic and industrial development. This is also the fundamental path to solutions for future economic challenges. The government will proactively cooperate with friends and allies, develop a diverse range of markets, and achieve closer integration of entities in the upper, middle, and lower reaches of industrial supply chains. This course of action will make Taiwan’s industrial ecosystem more complete, and will help Taiwanese industries upgrade and transform. We must also make good use of the competitive advantages we possess in such areas as semiconductor manufacturing, integrated chip design, ICT, and smart manufacturing to build Taiwan into an AI island, and promote relevant applications for food, clothing, housing, and transportation, as well as military, security and surveillance, next-generation communications, and the medical and health and wellness industries as we advance toward a smarter, more sustainable, and more prosperous new Taiwan. Strategy four: “Taiwan plus one,” i.e., new “Taiwan plus the US” arrangements: While staying firmly rooted in Taiwan, our enterprises are expanding their global presence and marketing worldwide. This has been our national economic development strategy, and the most important aspect is maintaining a solid base here in Taiwan. We absolutely must maintain a solid footing, and cannot allow the present strife to cause us to waver. Therefore, our government will incentivize investments, carry out deregulation, and continue to improve Taiwan’s investment climate by actively resolving problems involving access to water, electricity, land, human resources, and professional talent. This will enable corporations to stay in Taiwan and continue investing here. In addition, we must also help the overseas manufacturing facilities of offshore Taiwanese businesses to make necessary adjustments to support our “Taiwan plus one” policy, in that our national economic development strategy will be adjusted as follows: to stay firmly rooted in Taiwan while expanding our global presence, strengthening US ties, and marketing worldwide. We intend to make use of the new state of supply chains to strengthen cooperation between Taiwanese and US industries, and gain further access to US markets. Strategy five: Launch industry listening tours: All industrial firms, regardless of sector or size, will be affected to some degree once the US reciprocal tariffs go into effect. The administrative teams led by myself and Premier Cho will hear out industry concerns so that we can quickly resolve problems and make sure policies meet actual needs. My fellow citizens, over the past half-century and more, Taiwan has been through two energy crises, the Asian financial crisis, the global financial crisis, and pandemics. We have been able to not only withstand one test after another, but even turn crises into opportunities. The Taiwanese economy has emerged from these crises stronger and more resilient than ever. As we face this latest challenge, the government and civil society will work hand in hand, and I hope that all parties in the legislature, both ruling and opposition, will support the measures that the Executive Yuan will take to open up a broader path for Taiwan’s economy. Let us join together and give it our all. Thank you.

    MIL OSI Asia Pacific News

  • MIL-OSI United Nations: 23 April 2025 Policy and education: ways to end child marriage and prevent adolescent pregnancy

    Source: World Health Organisation

    Every year, an estimated 21 million girls aged 15–19 years in low- and middle-income countries become pregnant. Adolescent pregnancy leads to higher risks of maternal and infant mortality, a greater chance of mental health problems, and constraints for educational and economic prospects, which contributes to cycles of poverty and inequality that can span across generations

    In many parts of the world, adolescents lack access to the information and resources necessary to make informed decisions about their sexual and reproductive health (SRH). This leaves them vulnerable to unintended pregnancies; child marriage further fuels the risk.

    The World Health Organization (WHO) recently released an updated guideline for preventing early pregnancy and poor reproductive outcomes among adolescents in low- and middle-income countries, providing evidence-based normative guidance in two key areas: preventing child marriage and improving adolescents’ access to contraception. The recommendations highlight the importance of enabling laws and policies and education to achieve these goals.  

    The power of policy

    Many countries around the world have recently stepped up to make child marriage illegal. Colombia is one of these, with members of congress abolishing  a law in November 2024 that allowed marriages from the age of 14. Importantly, the new bill they introduced also includes measures to restore the rights of children and adolescents affected by underage marriages and unions, with a special emphasis on supporting indigenous people and other vulnerable communities.

    A joint effort by authorities and society is required to eradicate this practice and guarantee the protection of girls’ rights.

    Tamara Ospina / Government of Colombia’s Vice Minister of Women

     “The effective implementation of this law shows a change in the social norms that perpetuate child marriage. A joint effort by authorities and society is required to eradicate this practice and guarantee the protection of girls’ rights,” said Tamara Ospina, the Government of Colombia’s Vice Minister of Women. “It is essential to advance a campaign for cultural change that allows for the dismantling of traditional family views and promotes the participation of girls in different sectors, especially in the educational sector, to foster greater opportunities.”

    The WHO guideline recommends the formulation and implementation of such laws and policies that prevent marriage before age 18, in line with human rights standards. However, the guideline acknowledges, in agreement with the Human Right Council Resolution, that simply making child marriage illegal is not enough. Without additional support programmes, this approach could marginalize and stigmatize girls and families, and lead to more informal or unregistered marriages, unintentionally increasing the practice.

    This is why a comprehensive approach, that includes efforts to address the root causes of child marriage, such as poverty, gender inequality and access to education, is so important. The guideline also suggests the approach should also mobilize youth and adolescents, as well as political and governmental leaders, alongside religious, traditional and other influential people in the community to promote girls’ rights.

     The importance of comprehensive sexuality education

    The WHO guideline reinforces the interagency technical guidelines on sexuality education, emphasizing that comprehensive sexuality education is key to preventing adolescent pregnancy and improving contraceptive uptake. In Colombia, implementation of the law is facilitated by work led by adolescent girls to ensure that girls have access to sexuality education.

    Ángela Rosa Cervantes Bravo is a teen activist from a rural indigenous village in Colombia where she is heavily involved in an NGO called Sinumar Foundation that focuses on girls and sexuality education with the aim to prevent adolescent pregnancy in her community. Every year, the foundation organizes an entire week of speakers on sexual education. “During this time, our mothers, children in the community, and we, as young women, are guided and filled with knowledge about our bodies, contraceptive methods, and more. We sit down with boys and girls in mixed circles, talking about sexual education, violence and any other issue that might be relevant to the community,” Cervantes Bravo said.

    Discussing topics, such as adolescent pregnancy or child marriage, comes with its challenges due to the social stigma and traditional beliefs around it. “Some parents still get upset when they hear us discussing these things, but they need to understand that we are at a stage where these conversations are necessary,” she said. The experiences of Cervantes Bravo reinforce the need to engage parents and other community members in supporting adolescents, which is highlighted as another recommendation in the updated guideline.  

    Support tools for policy makers and programme managers will be rolled out to guide decision making and ensure that interventions are contextually relevant, to support the work of countries like Colombia and of NGO’s like Sinumar Foundation.

    Avni Amin, Unit Head of Rights and Equality Across the Life Course at WHO and the UN Special Programme on Human Reproduction (HRP) concludes: “While these guidelines offer a solid foundation for countries to address adolescent pregnancy and prevent child marriage, the true measure of their success lies in their implementation. It is essential that these guidelines are not only read but acted upon, integrated into national policies, and adapted to fit local contexts. Our goal is to see tangible changes on the ground that will empower young girls and protect their rights.” 

    Other countries that have taken recent measures to act on child marriage include Sierra Leone and Belize. Sierra Leone’s Prohibition of Child Marriage Act eliminated all exceptions that previously allowed marriage under 18, ensuring a strict nationwide ban. Similarly, Belize amended its Marriage Act to raise the legal marriage age from 16 to 18, without any exceptions, reinforcing its commitment to ending child marriage. 

    MIL OSI United Nations News

  • MIL-OSI: Check Point Software Reports 2025 First Quarter Financial Results

    Source: GlobeNewswire (MIL-OSI)

    TEL AVIV, Israel, April 23, 2025 (GLOBE NEWSWIRE) — Check Point® Software Technologies Ltd. (NASDAQ: CHKP), today announced its financial results for the quarter ended March 31st, 2025.

    First Quarter 2025 Financial Highlights:

    • Cash Flow from Operations: $421 million, a 17 percent increase year over year
    • Calculated Billings* reached $553 million, a 7 percent increase year over year
    • Remaining Performance Obligation (RPO)**: $2.4 billion, an 11 percent increase year over year
    • Total Revenues: $638 million, a 7 percent increase year over year
    • Products & Licenses Revenues: $114 million, a 14 percent increase year over year
    • Security Subscriptions Revenues: $291 million, a 10 percent increase year over year
    • GAAP Operating Income: $196 million, representing 31 percent of total revenues
    • Non-GAAP Operating Income: $259 million, representing 41 percent of total revenues
    • GAAP EPS: $1.71, a 7 percent increase year over year
    • Non-GAAP EPS: $2.21, a 9 percent increase year over year

    “The first quarter results have provided a solid foundation to expand upon as we progress through the year.  Strong demand for our Quantum Force appliances, fueled by refresh cycles and new projects delivered double-digit year-over-year growth in products and licenses revenues,” stated CEO Nadav Zafrir. “The AI-driven Infinity Platform, featuring a Hybrid Mesh Architecture, continues to resonate with customers and delivered another quarter of impressive double-digit year-over-year growth.”

    For information regarding the non-GAAP financial measures discussed in this release, as well as a reconciliation of such non-GAAP financial measures to the most directly comparable GAAP financial measures, please see below “Use of Non-GAAP Financial Information” and “Reconciliation of GAAP to Non-GAAP Financial Information.”

    Conference Call & Video Cast Information
    Check Point will host a conference call with the investment community on April 23, 2025, at 8:30 AM ET/5:30 AM PT. To listen to the live videocast or replay, please visit the website www.checkpoint.com/ir.

    Second Quarter 2025 Investor Conference Participation Schedule

    • Barclays Americas Select Franchise Conference 2025
      May 6, 2025, London, UK – Fireside Chat & 1×1’s
    • J.P. Morgan 53rd Annual Technology, Media, and Telecom Conference
      May 13-15, 2025, Boston, MA – Fireside Chat & 1×1’s
    • Oppenheimer 26th Annual Israeli Conference
      May 18, 2025, Tel Aviv, Israel – Fireside Chat & 1×1’s
    • TD Cowen 53rd Annual TMT Conference
      May 28, 2025, NY, NY – Fireside Chat & 1×1’s
    • Jefferies Software Summit
      May 29, 2025, Newport Coast, CA – Fireside Chat &1×1’s
    • Stifel 2025 Cross Sector 1×1 Conference
      June 3, 2025, Boston, MA – 1×1’s
    • Baird 2025 Global Consumer, Technology & Services Conference
      June 4, 2025, SF, CA – 1×1’s
    • Bank of America Merrill Lynch 2025 Global Technology Conference
      June 5, 2025, SF, CA – Fireside Chat & 1×1’s
    • TD Cowen 2nd Annual Corporate Access Day
      June 17, 2025, Toronto, Canada – 1×1’s

    Members of Check Point’s management team are expected to present at these conferences and discuss the latest company strategies and initiatives. Check Point’s conference presentations are expected to be available via webcast on the company’s web site. To hear these presentations and access the most updated information please visit the company’s web site at www.checkpoint.com/ir. The schedule is subject to change.

    Follow Check Point via:
    Twitter: http://www.twitter.com/checkpointsw
    Facebook: https://www.facebook.com/checkpointsoftware
    Blog: http://blog.checkpoint.com
    YouTube: http://www.youtube.com/user/CPGlobal
    LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/company/check-point-software-technologies

    About Check Point Software Technologies Ltd.
    Check Point Software Technologies Ltd. (http://www.checkpoint.com) is a leading AI-powered, cloud-delivered cyber security platform provider protecting over 100,000 organizations worldwide. Check Point leverages the power of AI everywhere to enhance cyber security efficiency and accuracy through its Infinity Platform, with industry-leading catch rates enabling proactive threat anticipation and smarter, faster response times. The comprehensive platform includes cloud-delivered technologies consisting of Check Point Harmony to secure the workspace, Check Point CloudGuard to secure the cloud, Check Point Quantum to secure the network, and Check Point Infinity Core Services for collaborative security operations and services.

    Legal Notice Regarding Forward-Looking Statements
    This press release contains forward-looking statements. Forward-looking statements generally relate to future events or our future financial or operating performance. Forward-looking statements in this press release include, but are not limited to, expectations regarding our products and solutions, and our participation in investor conferences and other events during the second quarter of 2025. Our expectations and beliefs regarding these matters may not materialize, and actual results or events in the future are subject to risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results or events to differ materially from those projected. These risks include our ability to continue to develop platform capabilities and solutions; customer acceptance and purchase of our existing solutions and new solutions; the market for IT security continuing to develop; competition from other products and services; appointments and departures of our executive officers; and general market, political, economic, and business conditions, including acts of terrorism or war. The forward-looking statements contained in this press release are also subject to other risks and uncertainties, including those more fully described in our filings with the Securities and Exchange Commission, including our Annual Report on Form 20-F filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on March 17, 2025. The forward-looking statements in this press release are based on information available to Check Point as of the date hereof, and Check Point disclaims any obligation to update any forward-looking statements, except as required by law.

    Use of Non-GAAP Financial Information
    In addition to reporting financial results in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, or GAAP, Check Point uses non-GAAP measures of operating income, net income and earnings per diluted share, which are adjustments from results based on GAAP to exclude, as applicable, stock-based compensation expenses, amortization of intangible assets and acquisition related expenses and the related tax affects. Check Point’s management believes the non-GAAP financial information provided in this release is useful to investors’ understanding and assessment of Check Point’s ongoing core operations and prospects for the future. Historically, Check Point has also publicly presented these supplemental non-GAAP financial measures to assist the investment community to see the company “through the eyes of management,” and thereby enhance understanding of its operating performance. The presentation of this non-GAAP financial information is not intended to be considered in isolation or as a substitute for results prepared in accordance with GAAP. A reconciliation of the non-GAAP financial measures discussed in this press release to the most directly comparable GAAP financial measures is included with the financial statements contained in this press release. Management uses both GAAP and non-GAAP information in evaluating and operating business internally and as such has determined that it is important to provide this information to investors.

    * Calculated Billings is a measure that we defined as total revenues recognized in accordance with GAAP plus the change in Total Deferred Revenues during the period.

    ** Remaining Performance Obligation (RPO) is a measure that represents the total value of non-cancellable contracted products and/or services that are yet to be recognized as Revenue as of March 31, 2025.

    CHECK POINT SOFTWARE TECHNOLOGIES LTD.
    CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF INCOME
     
    (Unaudited, in millions, except per share amounts)
     
      Three Months Ended
      March 31,
      2025   2024
    Revenues:      
    Products and licenses $ 114.1   $ 100.3
    Security subscriptions   290.6     263.4
    Total revenues from products and security subscriptions   404.7     363.7
    Software updates, maintenance and services   233.1     235.1
    Total revenues   637.8     598.8
           
    Operating expenses:      
    Cost of products and licenses   23.0     19.9
    Cost of security subscriptions   21.4     16.5
    Total cost of products and security subscriptions   44.4     36.4
    Cost of Software updates and maintenance   32.1     28.7
    Amortization of technology   7.6     5.8
    Total cost of revenues   84.1     70.9
           
    Research and development   102.1     99.2
    Selling and marketing   225.4     206.2
    General and administrative   30.7     28.6
    Total operating expenses   442.3     404.9
           
    Operating income   195.5     193.9
    Financial income, net   27.3     22.6
    Income before taxes on income   222.8     216.5
    Taxes on income   31.9     32.6
    Net income $ 190.9   $ 183.9
    Basic earnings per share $ 1.77   $ 1.64
    Number of shares used in computing basic earnings per share   107.9     112.3
    Diluted earnings per share $ 1.71   $ 1.60
    Number of shares used in computing diluted earnings per share   111.4     115.2
    CHECK POINT SOFTWARE TECHNOLOGIES LTD.
    SELECTED FINANCIAL METRICS
     
    (Unaudited, in millions, except per share amounts)
     
        Three Months Ended
        March 31,
        2025   2024
             
    Revenues   $ 637.8   $ 598.8
    Non-GAAP operating income     258.6     252.0
    Non-GAAP net income     246.2     234.5
    Non-GAAP diluted earnings per share   $ 2.21   $ 2.04
    Number of shares used in computing diluted Non-GAAP earnings per share     111.4     115.2
    CHECK POINT SOFTWARE TECHNOLOGIES LTD.
    RECONCILIATION OF GAAP TO NON-GAAP FINANCIAL INFORMATION
     
    (Unaudited, in millions, except per share amounts)
     
        Three Months Ended
        March 31,
          2025       2024  
             
    GAAP operating income   $ 195.5     $ 193.9  
    Stock-based compensation (1)     41.2       41.6  
    Amortization of intangible assets and acquisition related expenses (2) (*)     21.9       16.5  
    Non-GAAP operating income   $ 258.6     $ 252.0  
             
    GAAP net income   $ 190.9     $ 183.9  
    Stock-based compensation (1)     41.2       41.6  
    Amortization of intangible assets and acquisition related expenses (2) (*)     21.9       16.5  
    Taxes on the above items (3)     (7.8 )     (7.5 )
    Non-GAAP net income   $ 246.2     $ 234.5  
             
    GAAP diluted earnings per share   $ 1.71     $ 1.60  
    Stock-based compensation (1)     0.37       0.36  
    Amortization of intangible assets and acquisition related expenses (2) (*)     0.2       0.15  
    Taxes on the above items (3)     (0.07 )     (0.07 )
    Non-GAAP diluted earnings per share   $ 2.21     $ 2.04  
             
    Number of shares used in computing diluted Non-GAAP earnings per share     111.4       115.2  
             
    (1) Stock-based compensation:        
    Cost of products and licenses   $ 0.1     $ 0.1  
    Cost of software updates and maintenance     2.1       2.2  
    Research and development     14.7       14.7  
    Selling and marketing     14.6       15.9  
    General and administrative     9.7       8.7  
          41.2       41.6  
             
    (2) Amortization of intangible assets and acquisition related expenses (*):        
    Amortization of technology-cost of revenues     7.6       5.8  
    Research and development     1.5       1.6  
    Selling and marketing     12.8       9.1  
          21.9       16.5  

    (3) Taxes on the above items

        (7.8 )     (7.5 )
    Total, net   $ 55.3     $ 50.6  
     

    (*) While amortization of acquired intangible assets is excluded from the measures, the revenue of the acquired companies is reflected in the measures and the acquired assets contribute to revenue generation.

    CHECK POINT SOFTWARE TECHNOLOGIES LTD.
    CONDENSED CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET DATA

    (In millions)

    ASSETS

     
          March 31,   December 31,
          2025
    (Unaudited)
      2024
    (Audited)
    Current assets:          
    Cash and cash equivalents     $ 450.2   $ 506.2
    Marketable securities and short-term deposits       1,012.0     865.7
    Trade receivables, net       399.7     728.8
    Prepaid expenses and other current assets       94.5     92.7
    Total current assets       1,956.4     2,193.4
               
    Long-term assets:          
    Marketable securities       1,469.8     1,411.9
    Property and equipment, net       83.0     80.8
    Deferred tax asset, net       80.6     74.7
    Goodwill and other intangible assets, net       1,877.9     1,897.1
    Other assets       90.2     96.6
    Total long-term assets       3,601.5     3,561.1
               
    Total assets     $ 5,557.9   $ 5,754.5
    LIABILITIES AND SHAREHOLDERS’ EQUITY
     
    Current liabilities:          
    Deferred revenues     $ 1,389.8     $ 1,471.3  
    Trade payables and other accrued liabilities       394.8       472.9  
    Total current liabilities       1,784.6       1,944.2  
               
    Long-term liabilities:          
    Long-term deferred revenues       525.6       529.0  
    Income tax accrual       467.4       459.6  
    Other long-term liabilities       31.8       32.3  
    Total long-term liabilities       1,024.8       1,020.9  
               
    Total liabilities       2,809.4       2,965.1  
               
    Shareholders’ equity:          
    Share capital       0.8       0.8  
    Additional paid-in capital       3,125.5       3,049.5  
    Treasury shares at cost       (14,579.6 )     (14,264.4 )
    Accumulated other comprehensive gain       (2.9 )     (10.3 )
    Retained earnings       14,204.7       14,013.8  
    Total shareholders’ equity       2,748.5       2,789.4  
    Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity     $ 5,557.9     $ 5,754.5  
    Total cash and cash equivalents, marketable securities, and short-term deposits     $ 2,932.0     $ 2,783.8  
    CHECK POINT SOFTWARE TECHNOLOGIES LTD.
    SELECTED CONSOLIDATED CASH FLOW DATA
     
    (Unaudited, in millions)
     
      Three Months Ended
      March 31,
        2025       2024  
    Cash flow from operating activities:      
    Net income $ 190.9     $ 183.9  
    Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash provided by operating activities:      
    Depreciation of property and equipment   5.2       7.3  
    Amortization of intangible assets   19.2       13.5  
    Stock-based compensation   41.2       41.6  
    Realized loss on marketable securities   0.1        
    Decrease in trade and other receivables, net   329.4       265.4  
    Decrease in deferred revenues, trade payables and other accrued liabilities   (142.1 )     (140.6 )
    Deferred income taxes, net   (22.8 )     (10.1 )
    Net cash provided by operating activities   421.1       361.0  
           
    Cash flow from investing activities:      
    Investment in property and equipment   (7.4 )     (6.5 )
    Net cash used in investing activities   (7.4 )     (6.5 )
           
    Cash flow from financing activities:      
    Proceeds from issuance of shares upon exercise of options   46.0       45.6  
    Purchase of treasury shares   (325.0 )     (325.0 )
    Payments related to shares withheld for taxes   (1.5 )     (1.1 )
    Net cash used in financing activities   (280.5 )     (280.5 )
           
    Unrealized gain on marketable securities, net   15.0       1.6  
           
    Increase in cash and cash equivalents, marketable securities, and short-term deposits   148.2       75.6  
           
    Cash and cash equivalents, marketable securities, and short-term deposits at the beginning of the period   2,783.8       2,959.7  
           
    Cash and cash equivalents, marketable securities, and short-term deposits at the end of the period $ 2,932.0     $ 3,035.3  

    The MIL Network

  • MIL-OSI United Kingdom: Sheffield payroll director banned after company went into liquidation with £2.5 million VAT bill

    Source: United Kingdom – Executive Government & Departments

    Press release

    Sheffield payroll director banned after company went into liquidation with £2.5 million VAT bill

    The company substantially under-declared the amount of tax it had to pay in 2020 and 2021

    • Hubert Omukhulu failed to declare the correct amount of VAT his Remedy Payroll Solutions Ltd company was required to pay  

    • VAT returns submitted by the company in a 15-month period between June 2020 and September 2021 suggested it had little more than £250,000 to pay 

    • In reality, the company owed more than £2.5 million in tax

    The boss of an umbrella company which failed to pay more than £2.5 million in VAT has been banned as a director. 

    Hubert Omukhulu, 36, failed to accurately declare the amount of VAT Remedy Payroll Solutions Ltd had to pay in 2020 and 2021. 

    The inaccurate returns Remedy Payroll Solutions submitted suggested the company had no VAT to pay in 2020 and just over a quarter of a million pounds in 2021. 

    However, this was an under-declaration of more than £2 million according to calculations from HM Revenue and Customs (HMRC). 

    Omukhulu, of Nethershire Lane, Sheffield, has now been disqualified as a company director for eight years.

    Kevin Read, Chief Investigator at the Insolvency Service, said:

    Hubert Omukhulu allowed his payroll supply company to substantially under-declare the amount of VAT it owed in 2020 and 2021. 

    More than £2 million in VAT was not paid by the company. This money should have gone towards funding vital public services such as the NHS, schools and our nation’s defence. 

    Omukhulu’s conduct falls well below the standards the Insolvency Service expects which is why he has been banned as a company director until 2033.

    Debbie Porter, Assistant Director of Fraud Investigation Service at HMRC, said:

    We are determined to create a level playing field that allows honest businesses to thrive which is why it’s crucial we work closely with the Insolvency Service and other partners to act against rogue directors.  

    The majority pay the tax that is due, but we will pursue those who refuse to play by the rules.

    Remedy Payroll Solutions was established in May 2020 with Omukhulu as its sole director.  

    The company initially had its registered office as Omukhulu’s home address in Sheffield before switching it on several occasions between addresses in Romford and Hainault. 

    Remedy Payroll Solutions submitted three VAT returns in 2020 claiming it had no tax to pay in that year. 

    The company submitted another three returns in 2021, claiming it had a combined £264,276 to pay in VAT. 

    HMRC investigated Remedy Payroll Solutions’ bank accounts and contacted its customers. Through their investigations, they calculated that £2,584,044 was owed by the company in VAT. 

    Remedy Payroll Solutions went into liquidation in July 2022. 

    Omukhulu claimed there was third-party involvement in the running of Remedy Payroll Solutions but failed to provide any evidence of this when asked by the Insolvency Service. 

    The Secretary of State for Business and Trade accepted a disqualification undertaking from Omukhulu and his ban started on Thursday 17 April.  

    The undertaking prevents him from being involved in the promotion, formation or management of a company, without the permission of the court.

    Further information

    Updates to this page

    Published 23 April 2025

    MIL OSI United Kingdom

  • MIL-OSI United Kingdom: Reeves: I will always act to defend British interests

    Source: United Kingdom – Executive Government & Departments

    Press release

    Reeves: I will always act to defend British interests

    Chancellor Rachel Reeves travels to Washington DC for her first spring meetings of the International Monetary Fund (IMF).

    The Chancellor has pledged to “stand up for Britain’s national interest”, as she heads to Washington DC for her first spring meetings of the International Monetary Fund (IMF).

    During a three-day visit to the United States, Rachel Reeves is set to hold meetings with G7, G20 and IMF counterparts about the changing global economy. She will make the case for open trade that provides stability for businesses and security for working people. The Chancellor will underline the importance of tackling barriers to trade to kickstart economic growth, supporting businesses and putting more money in working people’s pockets.

    Earlier this month the Chancellor announced over £400 million of trade and investment deals with the Indian Government across a range of business sectors, including defence, financial services, education, and development. In recent weeks the government has acted to save British Steel, safeguarding the future of steelmaking in the UK and protecting 2,700 jobs in Scunthorpe and up to 37,000 jobs in the wider supply chain, announced a £20 billion boost to UK Export Finance which will give thousands of British access to government-backed financing and announced new measures to give British car makers certainty and stability, and to support them on the transition to electric vehicles. Earlier this month over 3 million workers in shops, restaurants and workplaces across the UK received a pay boost worth £1,400 a year for an eligible full-time worker, while also rolling out free breakfast clubs in primary schools putting £450 a year in the pockets of working parents and protecting the payslips of working people from higher taxes.

    She will hold discussions with finance ministers about the opportunities to strengthen economic ties with Britain, including members of the Comprehensive and Progressive Agreement for Trans-Pacific Partnership. Talks with European finance ministers will also focus on going further and faster to increase defence spending and improve cooperation in response to continued Russian aggression and the invasion of Ukraine.

    Reeves will hold her first in person meeting with her US counterpart Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent about working together to deepen the UK-US economic partnership through a new trade agreement.

    In Washington, the Chancellor will also meet with business leaders to talk about the government’s Plan for Change to kickstart economic growth. She will champion Britain as the best place to live, work and grow a business, highlighting the government’s ambition to go further and faster to tackle the barriers to investment. By backing the builders not the blockers, through reforms to the National Planning Policy Framework – which alone is expected to deliver an extra 170,000 homes by 2029/30, as well upcoming the Planning and Infrastructure Bill and a government pledge to cut the administrative cost of regulation on business by a quarter, making Britain the best place to do business and drive economic growth.

    Speaking ahead of her visit, Chancellor of the Exchequer Rachel Reeves said:

    The world has changed, and we are in a new era of global trade. I am in no doubt that the imposition of tariffs will have a profound impact on the global economy and the economy at home.

    This changing world is unsettling for families who are worried about the cost of living and businesses concerned about what tariffs will means for them. But our task as a government is not to be knocked off course or to take rash action which risks undermining people’s security.

    Instead, we must rise to meet the moment and I will always act to defend British interests as part of our Plan for Change. We need a world economy that provides stability and fairness for businesses wanting to invest and trade, more trade and global partnerships between nations with shared interests, and security for working people who want to get on with their lives.

    Updates to this page

    Published 23 April 2025

    MIL OSI United Kingdom

  • MIL-OSI: BE Semiconductor Industries N.V. Announces Q1-25 Results

    Source: GlobeNewswire (MIL-OSI)

    Q1-25 Revenue of € 144.1 Million and Net Income of € 31.5 Million
    Orders of € 131.9 Million Up 8.2% vs. Q4-24

    DUIVEN, The Netherlands, April 23, 2025 (GLOBE NEWSWIRE) — BE Semiconductor Industries N.V. (the “Company” or “Besi”) (Euronext Amsterdam: BESI; OTC markets: BESIY), a leading manufacturer of assembly equipment for the semiconductor industry, today announced its results for the first quarter ended March 31, 2025.

    Key Highlights

    • Revenue of € 144.1 million, down 6.1% vs. Q4-24 due primarily to lower shipments for high-end mobile applications. Vs. Q1-24, down 1.5% due to lower shipments for mobile and automotive applications partially offset by strong growth in hybrid bonding and other AI related computing applications
    • Orders of € 131.9 million up 8.2% vs. Q4-24 primarily due to increased bookings by Asian subcontractors for AI related data center applications. Up 3.3% vs. Q1-24 due to higher bookings for hybrid bonding and other advanced computing applications  
    • Gross margin of 63.6% decreased by 0.4 points vs. Q4-24 and 3.6 points vs. Q1-24 due primarily to a less favorable product mix and, to a lesser extent, adverse net forex influences
    • Net income of € 31.5 million decreased 46.9% vs. Q4-24 primarily due to the absence of an € 18.2 million net tax benefit recognized in Q4-24, lower revenue and higher consulting costs. Down 7.4% vs. Q1-24 primarily due to lower revenue and gross margins partially offset by an 8.9% decrease in operating expenses. Similarly, Besi’s net margin declined to 21.9% vs. 38.6% in Q4-24 and 23.2% in Q1-24
    • Ex share-based incentive compensation and tax benefits, Besi’s adjusted net income (net margin) was € 35.9 million (24.9%) in Q1-25 vs. € 43.2 million (28.2%) in Q4-24 and € 49.5 million (33.8%) in Q1-24
    • Net cash of € 159.4 million increased € 15.6 million, or 10.8%, vs. Q4-24

    Outlook   

    • Revenue expected to be flat (plus or minus 10%) vs. € 144.1 million reported in Q1-25
    • Gross margin expected to range between 62-64% vs. 63.6% realized in Q1-25
    • Operating expenses expected to decrease 0-10% vs. € 52.5 million in Q1-25
    (€ millions, except EPS) Q1-2025 Q4-2024 Δ Q1-2024 Δ
    Revenue 144.1 153.4 -6.1% 146.3 -1.5%
    Orders 131.9 121.9 +8.2% 127.7 +3.3%
    Gross Margin 63.6% 64.0% -0.4 67.2% -3.6
    Operating Income 39.3 50.6 -22.3% 40.7 -3.4%
    EBITDA 46.6 58.0 -19.7% 47.5 -1.9%
    Net Income* 31.5 59.3 -46.9% 34.0 -7.4%
    Net Margin* 21.9 38.6% -16.7 23.2% -1.3
    EPS (basic) 0.40 0.75 -46.7% 0.44 -9.1%
    EPS (diluted) 0.40 0.74 -45.9% 0.44 -9.1%
    Net Cash and Deposits 159.4 143.8 +10.8% 180.9 -11.9%

    * Excluding share-based compensation expense and an € 18.2 million net tax benefit recognized in Q4-24, Besi’s adjusted net income (net margin) would have been € 35.9 million (24.9%), € 43.2 million (28.2%) and € 49.5 million (33.8%) in Q1-25, Q4-24 and Q1-24, respectively.

    Richard W. Blickman, President and Chief Executive Officer of Besi, commented:
    “Besi reported solid first quarter results and important new advanced packaging orders in a challenging market environment. Revenue of € 144.1 million was down 1.5% versus Q1-24 due to ongoing weakness in mobile and automotive end user markets partially offset by strong revenue growth from hybrid bonding and other AI related computing applications. In contrast, orders increased 3.3% versus Q1-24 and 8.2% versus Q4-24 due primarily to increased bookings by Asian subcontractors for AI related data center applications which more than offset weakness in mobile, automotive and Chinese end user markets.

    Of note, significant progress was made on Besi’s wafer level assembly agenda this quarter as we received hybrid bonding orders from two leading memory producers for HBM 4 applications as well as follow-on orders from a leading Asian foundry for logic applications. Further, important announcements were made by two leading semiconductor producers with respect to future hybrid bonding applications such as ASICs and co packaged optics. In addition, a leading US logic manufacturer successfully began production of AI related logic devices utilizing Besi’s hybrid bonders in integrated production lines.

    Besi’s profitability in Q1-25 remained at attractive levels despite ongoing weakness in mainstream assembly markets and expanded R&D investment in next generation assembly solutions for AI applications. Net income of € 31.5 million decreased 7.4% vs. Q1-24 primarily due to lower revenue and gross margins realized partially offset by an 8.9% decrease in operating expenses. Our gross margin has trended toward the lower end of our target range over the past three quarters due primarily to a less favorable product mix, particularly with respect to high-end smartphones, and net forex headwinds beginning in the second half of 2024 from adverse movements in some of our principal transaction currencies versus the euro. In addition, cash flow generation remains very positive with net cash at quarter end increasing 10.8% vs. Q4-24 to reach € 159.4 million.

    On April 14, Applied Materials announced a 9% ownership position in Besi. Besi and Applied Materials have been successfully collaborating since 2020 to co-develop the industry’s first fully integrated equipment solution for die-based hybrid bonding. The collaboration brings together Applied’s expertise in front-end wafer and chip processing with Besi’s leadership position in bonding accuracy and speed. We view their shareholding as a strategic, long-term investment and a further validation of our wafer level assembly technology and strategy.

    Our business development this year reflects the contrasting growth trends seen in the assembly equipment market between AI and mainstream applications. The timing and trajectory of a mainstream assembly upturn is more difficult to predict now given new tariff uncertainties. However, demand for advanced packaging for AI applications remains strong given upcoming new device introductions and use cases planned in the 2026-2028 time period. We continue to assess the potential impact of tariffs on Besi’s customers, supply chain and end user markets. For Q2-25, we forecast that revenue will be flat plus or minus 10% versus Q1-25 with gross margins in a range of 62%-64%. In addition, aggregate operating expenses are forecast to decrease 0-10% versus Q1-25 primarily due to a reduction in strategic consulting costs.”

    Share Repurchase Activity
    During the quarter, Besi repurchased approximately 187,000 of its ordinary shares at an average price of € 117.95 per share for a total of € 22.1 million. Cumulatively, as of March 31, 2025, a total of € 51.4 million has been purchased under the current € 100 million share repurchase plan at an average price of € 114.64 per share. As of March 31, 2025, Besi held approximately 2.0 million shares in treasury equal to 2.5% of its shares outstanding.

    Investor and media conference call
    A conference call and webcast for investors and media will be held today at 4:00 pm CET (10:00 am EDT). To register for the conference call and/or to access the audio webcast and webinar slides, please visit www.besi.com.
    Important Dates  
    •  Annual General Meeting of Shareholders April 23, 2025
    •  Investor Day/Amsterdam June 12, 2025
    •  Publication Q2/semi-annual results July 24, 2025
    •  Publication Q3/nine-month results October 23, 2025
    •  Publication Q4/full year results February 2026
       
    Dividend Information*  
    •  Proposed ex-dividend date April 25, 2025
    •  Proposed record date April 28, 2025
    •  Proposed payment of 2024 dividend Starting May 2, 2025
       

    * Subject to approval at Besi’s AGM on April 23, 2025

    Basis of Presentation
    The accompanying Consolidated Financial Statements have been prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (“IFRS”) as adopted by the European Union. Reference is made to the Summary of Significant Accounting Policies to the Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements as included in our 2024 Annual Report, which is available on www.besi.com.

    Contacts:
    Richard W. Blickman, President & CEO
    Andrea Kopp-Battaglia, Senior Vice President Finance      
    Claudia Vissers, Executive Secretary/IR coordinator
    Edmond Franco, VP Corporate Development/US IR coordinator
    Michael Sullivan, Investor Relations
    Tel. (31) 26 319 4500
    investor.relations@besi.com

    About Besi
    Besi is a leading manufacturer of assembly equipment supplying a broad portfolio of advanced packaging solutions to the semiconductor and electronics industries. We offer customers high levels of accuracy, reliability and throughput at a lower cost of ownership with a principal focus on wafer level and substrate assembly solutions. Customers are primarily leading semiconductor manufacturers, foundries, assembly subcontractors and electronics and industrial companies. Besi’s ordinary shares are listed on Euronext Amsterdam (symbol: BESI). Its Level 1 ADRs are listed on the OTC markets (symbol: BESIY) and its headquarters are located in Duiven, the Netherlands. For more information, please visit our website at www.besi.com.

    Caution Concerning Forward Looking Statements
    This press release contains statements about management’s future expectations, plans and prospects of our business that constitute forward-looking statements, which are found in various places throughout the press release, including, but not limited to, statements relating to expectations of orders, net sales, product shipments, expenses, timing of purchases of assembly equipment by customers, gross margins, operating results and capital expenditures. The use of words such as “anticipate”, “estimate”, “expect”, “can”, “intend”, “believes”, “may”, “plan”, “predict”, “project”, “forecast”, “will”, “would”, and similar expressions are intended to identify forward-looking statements, although not all forward-looking statements contain these identifying words. The financial guidance set forth under the heading “Outlook” contains such forward-looking statements. While these forward-looking statements represent our judgments and expectations concerning the development of our business, a number of risks, uncertainties and other important factors could cause actual developments and results to differ materially from those contained in forward-looking statements, including any inability to maintain continued demand for our products; failure of anticipated orders to materialize or postponement or cancellation of orders, generally without charges; the volatility in the demand for semiconductors and our products and services; the extent and duration of the COVID-19 and other global pandemics and the associated adverse impacts on the global economy, financial markets, global supply chains and our operations as well as those of our customers and suppliers; failure to develop new and enhanced products and introduce them at competitive price levels; failure to adequately decrease costs and expenses as revenues decline; loss of significant customers, including through industry consolidation or the emergence of industry alliances; lengthening of the sales cycle; acts of terrorism and violence; disruption or failure of our information technology systems; consolidation activity and industry alliances in the semiconductor industry that may result in further increased customer concentration, inability to forecast demand and inventory levels for our products; the integrity of product pricing and protection of our intellectual property in foreign jurisdictions; risks, such as changes in trade regulations, conflict minerals regulations, currency fluctuations, political instability and war, associated with substantial foreign customers, suppliers and foreign manufacturing operations, particularly to the extent occurring in the Asia Pacific region where we have a substantial portion of our production facilities; potential instability in foreign capital markets; the risk of failure to successfully manage our diverse operations; any inability to attract and retain skilled personnel, including as a result of restrictions on immigration, travel or the availability of visas for skilled technology workers.

    In addition, the United States and other countries have recently levied tariffs and taxes on certain goods and could significantly increase or impose new tariffs on a broad array of goods. They have imposed, and may continue to impose, new trade restrictions and export regulations. Increased or new tariffs and additional taxes, including any retaliatory measures, trade restrictions and export regulations, could negatively impact end-user demand and customer investment in semiconductor equipment, increase Besi’s supply chain complexity and manufacturing costs, decrease margins, reduce the competitiveness of our products or restrict our ability to sell products, provide services or purchase necessary equipment and supplies. Any or all of the foregoing factor could have a material and adverse effect on our business, results of operations or financial condition. In addition, investors should consider those additional risk factors set forth in Besi’s annual report for the year ended December 31, 2024 and other key factors that could adversely affect our businesses and financial performance contained in our filings and reports, including our statutory consolidated statements. We expressly disclaim any obligation to update or alter our forward-looking statements whether as a result of new information, future events or otherwise.

    Consolidated Statements of Operations
     
    (€ thousands, except share and per share data) Three Months Ended
    March 31,
    (unaudited)
      2025 2024
         
    Revenue 144,145 146,314
    Cost of sales 52,423 48,043
         
    Gross profit 91,722 98,271
         
    Selling, general and administrative expenses 32,958 39,641
    Research and development expenses 19,502 17,919
         
    Total operating expenses 52,460 57,560
         
    Operating income 39,262 40,711
         
    Financial expense, net 2,959 589
         
    Income before taxes 36,303 40,122
         
    Income tax expense 4,797 6,143
         
    Net income 31,506 33,979
         
    Net income per share – basic 0.40 0.44
    Net income per share – diluted 0.40 0.44
         
    Number of shares used in computing per share amounts:    
    – basic 79,228,071 77,181,326
    – diluted 1 81,522,177 82,106,146

    _____________________________
    1) The calculation of diluted income per share assumes the exercise of equity settled share based payments and the conversion of all Convertible Notes outstanding

    Consolidated Balance Sheets
     
    (€ thousands) March
    31, 2025
    (unaudited)
    December
    31, 2024
    (audited)
    ASSETS    
         
    Cash and cash equivalents 405,736 342,319
    Deposits 280,000 330,000
    Trade receivables 170,440 181,862
    Inventories 103,836 103,285
    Other current assets 46,099 40,927
         
    Total current assets 1,006,111 998,393
         
    Property, plant and equipment 42,868 44,773
    Right of use assets 15,161 15,726
    Goodwill 45,610 46,010
    Other intangible assets 98,622 96,677
    Deferred tax assets 29,240 31,567
    Other non-current assets 1,347 1,330
         
    Total non-current assets 232,848 236,083
         
    Total assets 1,238,959 1,234,476
         
         
         
    Bank overdraft 840 776
    Current portion of long-term debt 2,042
    Trade payables 46,598 52,630
    Other current liabilities 111,170 111,531
         
    Total current liabilities 158,608 166,979
         
    Long-term debt 525,493 525,653
    Lease liabilities 11,770 12,350
    Deferred tax liabilities 10,416 10,320
    Other non-current liabilities 19,328 17,910
         
    Total non-current liabilities 567,007 566,233
         
    Total equity 513,344 501,264
         
    Total liabilities and equity 1,238,959 1,234,476
    Consolidated Cash Flow Statements
     
    (€ thousands) Three Months Ended March 31,
    (unaudited)
     
      2025   2024  
         
    Cash flows from operating activities:    
         
    Income before income tax 36,303   40,122  
         
    Depreciation and amortization 7,307   6,813  
    Share based payment expense 4,441   16,900  
    Financial expense, net 2,959   589  
         
    Changes in working capital (2,113 ) (3,251 )
    Interest (paid) received (2,887 ) 1,169  
    Income tax (paid) received (1,575 ) (2,089 )
         
    Net cash provided by operating activities 44,435   60,253  
         
    Cash flows from investing activities:    
    Capital expenditures (1,733 ) (5,650 )
    Capitalized development expenses (6,737 ) (4,663 )
    Repayments of (investments in) deposits 50,000   10,000  
         
    Net cash provided by (used in) investing activities 41,530   (313 )
         
    Cash flows from financing activities:    
    Proceeds from bank lines of credit 64    
    Payments of lease liabilities (1,114 ) (1,043 )
    Purchase of treasury shares (22,064 ) (14,779 )
         
    Net cash provided by (used in) financing activities (23,114 ) (15,822 )
         
    Net increase (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents 62,851   44,118  
    Effect of changes in exchange rates on cash and cash equivalents 566   (542 )
    Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of the period 342,319   188,477  
         
    Cash and cash equivalents at end of the period 405,736   232,053  
    Supplemental Information (unaudited)
    (€ millions, unless stated otherwise)
     
    REVENUE Q1-2025 Q4-2024 Q3-2024 Q2-2024 Q1-2024
                         
    Per geography:                    
    China 40.5   28 % 42.8   28 % 45.5   29 % 57.5   38 % 58.5   40 %
    Asia Pacific (excl. China) 56.3   39 % 53.5   35 % 51.6   33 % 54.1   36 % 43.6   30 %
    EU / USA / Other 47.3   33 % 57.1   37 % 59.5   38 % 39.6   26 % 44.2   30 %
                         
    Total 144.1   100 % 153.4   100 % 156.6   100 % 151.2   100 % 146.3   100 %
                         
    ORDERS Q1-2025 Q4-2024 Q3-2024 Q2-2024 Q1-2024
                         
    Per geography:                    
    China 39.7   30 % 40.4   33 % 45.4   30 % 43.3   23 % 51.1   40 %
    Asia Pacific (excl. China) 51.7   39 % 38.8   32 % 69.3   46 % 72.0   39 % 45.0   35 %
    EU / USA / Other 40.5   31 % 42.7   35 % 37.1   24 % 69.9   38 % 31.6   25 %
                         
    Total 131.9   100 % 121.9   100 % 151.8   100 % 185.2   100 % 127.7   100 %
                         
    Per customer type:                    
    IDM 48.1   36 % 61.2   50 % 84.5   56 % 122.4   66 % 53.5   42 %
    Foundries/Subcontractors 83.8   64 % 60.7   50 % 67.3   44 % 62.8   34 % 74.2   58 %
                         
    Total 131.9   100 % 121.9   100 % 151.8   100 % 185.2   100 % 127.7   100 %
                         
    HEADCOUNT Mar 31, 2025 Dec 31, 2024 Sep 30, 2024 Jun 30, 2024 Mar 31, 2024
                         
    Fixed staff (FTE) 1,820   88 % 1,812   93 % 1,807   87 % 1,783   86 % 1,760   88 %
    Temporary staff (FTE) 251   12 % 134   7 % 271   13 % 279   14 % 236   12 %
                         
    Total 2,071   100 % 1,946   100 % 2,078   100 % 2,062   100 % 1,996   100 %
                         
    OTHER FINANCIAL DATA Q1-2025 Q4-2024 Q3-2024 Q2-2024 Q1-2024
                         
    Gross profit 91.7   63.6 % 98.2   64.0 % 101.2   64.7 % 98.3   65.0 % 98.3   67.2 %
                         
                         
    Selling, general and admin expenses:                    
    As reported 33.0   22.9 % 28.6   18.6 % 27.3   17.4 % 30.5   20.2 % 39.6   27.1 %
    Share-based compensation expense (4.4 ) -3.1 % (2.9 ) -1.8 % (3.4 ) -2.1 % (6.9 ) -4.6 % (16.9 ) -11.6 %
                         
    SG&A expenses as adjusted 28.6   19.8 % 25.7   16.8 % 23.9   15.3 % 23.6   15.6 % 22.7   15.5 %
                         
                         
    Research and development expenses:                    
    As reported 19.5   13.5 % 19.0   12.4 % 18.9   12.1 % 18.5   12.2 % 17.9   12.2 %
    Capitalization of R&D charges 6.7   4.6 % 5.4   3.5 % 4.4   2.8 % 4.9   3.2 % 4.7   3.2 %
    Amortization of intangibles (3.7 ) -2.5 % (3.9 ) -2.5 % (3.9 ) -2.5 % (3.6 ) -2.3 % (3.6 ) -2.4 %
                         
    R&D expenses as adjusted 22.5   15.6 % 20.5   13.4 % 19.4   12.4 % 19.8   13.1 % 19.0   13.0 %
                         
                         
    Financial expense (income), net:                    
    Interest income (5.0 )   (5.1 )   (5.2 )   (3.0 )   (4.0 )  
    Interest expense 6.3     6.1     5.7     2.1     2.8    
    Net cost of hedging 1.8     2.0     1.9     1.4     1.6    
    Foreign exchange effects, net (0.1 )   0.9     (0.8 )   0.5     0.2    
                         
    Total 3.0     3.9     1.6     1.0     0.6    
                         
                         
    Operating income (as % of net sales) 39.3   27.2 % 50.6   33.0 % 55.1   35.2 % 49.3   32.6 % 40.7   27.8 %
                         
    EBITDA (as % of net sales) 46.6   32.3 % 58.0   37.8 % 62.4   39.8 % 56.2   37.2 % 47.5   32.5 %
                         
    Net income (as % of net sales) 31.5   21.9 % 59.3   38.6 % 46.8   29.9 % 41.9   27.7 % 34.0   23.2 %
                         
    Effective tax rate 13.2 %   -27.0 %   12.6 %   13.0 %   15.3 %  
                         
                         
    Income per share                    
    Basic 0.40     0.75     0.59     0.53     0.44    
    Diluted 0.40     0.74     0.59     0.53     0.44    
                         
    Average shares outstanding (basic) 79,228,071   79,402,192   79,630,787   79,281,533   77,181,326  
                         
    Shares repurchased                    
    Amount 22.1     22.4     27.8     14.8     14.8    
    Number of shares 186,869   198,450   230,807   105,042   101,049  
                         
                         
    Gross cash 685.7     672.3     637.4     257.2     447.1    
                         
    Net cash 159.4     143.8     110.7     74.4     180.9    
                         

    The MIL Network

  • MIL-OSI: Nykredit extends the offer period concerning the recommended, voluntary public tender offer for Spar Nord Bank A/S until 20 May 2025 – Nykredit Realkredit A/S

    Source: GlobeNewswire (MIL-OSI)

    THIS ANNOUNCEMENT IS PUBLISHED PURSUANT TO SECTIONS 9(3)-(5) AND SECTION 21(3) OF EXECUTIVE ORDER NO. 636 OF 15 MAY 2020

    NOT FOR RELEASE, PUBLICATION OR DISTRIBUTION, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, IN OR TO ANY JURISDICTION WHERE DOING SO WOULD CONSTITUTE A VIOLATION OF THE RELEVANT LAWS OR REGULATIONS OF SUCH JURISDICTION

    Publication of supplement concerning extension of offer period for Nykredit’s recommended, voluntary public tender offer for Spar Nord Bank A/S until 20 May 2025

    23 April 2025

    Nykredit extends the offer period concerning the recommended, voluntary public tender offer for Spar Nord Bank A/S until 20 May 2025

    In accordance with section 4(1) of the Danish Takeover Order1, Nykredit Realkredit A/S (“Nykredit”) announced on 10 December 2024 that Nykredit intended to submit a voluntary public tender offer (the “Offer”) to acquire all shares in Spar Nord Bank A/S (“Spar Nord Bank”), with the exception of Spar Nord Bank’s treasury shares, for a cash price of DKK 210 per share, valuing the aggregated issued share capital of Spar Nord Bank at DKK 24.7 billion. As stated in the supplement dated April 2, 2025, the offer price has subsequently been increased to DKK 210.50 per share.

    On 8 January 2025, Nykredit published the offer document regarding the Offer (the “Offer Document”), as approved by the Danish FSA in accordance with section 11 of the Danish Takeover Order. In the Offer Document, the offer period was set to expire on 19 February 2025 at 23:59 (CET) (the “Initial Offer Period”). The Initial Offer Period was subsequently extended in supplements dated 18 February, 19 March and, most recently, 2 April 2025, where the offer period was extended to 24 April 2025 at 23:59 (CEST).

    Today, Nykredit published a supplement (the “Supplement”) to the Offer Document, which further extends the offer period for the Offer. The Supplement has been approved by the Danish FSA on 23 April 2025 in accordance with section 9(3)-(5) of the Danish Takeover Order. The Supplement should be read in conjunction with the Offer Document and the previous supplements.

    With this Supplement, Nykredit further extends the offer period, such that the Offer will expire on 20 May 2025 at 23:59 (CEST). Subsequently, any reference to the “Offer Period” in the Offer Document or other documents relating to the Offer will refer to the period commencing on the day of publication of the Offer Document on 8 January 2025 and ending on 20 May 2025 at 23:59 (CEST) (the “Extended Offer Period”).

    Nykredit has been informed by the Danish Competition and Consumer Authority that Nykredit’s merger notification regarding the Nykredit’s acquisition of sole control over Spar Nord Bank is considered complete as of 31 March 2025. Nykredit awaits the Danish Competition and Consumer Authority’s decision.

    The purpose of the extension is to provide Nykredit with time to obtain the approval from the Danish Competition and Consumer Authority required to complete the Offer. If the approval from the Danish Competition and Consumer Authority has not been granted by the expiry of the Extended Offer Period, Nykredit expects to extend the offer period further.

    The extension of the offer period entails that the expected completion of the Offer and settlement of the offer price to the Spar Nord Bank shareholders who have accepted the Offer will be extended correspondingly. Completion is subsequently expected to take place on 28 May 2025 (provided that the offer period is not extended further).

    At the time of this announcement, Nykredit holds 32.79 per cent of the shares in Spar Nord Bank.

    In the supplement dated 19 March 2025 to the Offer Document, Nykredit announced that a preliminary compilation of the acceptances that Nykredit had information about showed that, including the irrevocable undertakings, acceptances corresponding to more than 46 per cent of the share capital of Spar Nord Bank had been submitted, and that Nykredit’s ownership interest in Spar Nord Bank, together with the irrevocable undertakings and the binding acceptances submitted that Nykredit had information about, totalled more than 80 per cent of the total share capital (excluding treasury shares) of Spar Nord Bank, indicating that the 67 per cent acceptance limit stated in the Offer has been reached. The final result of the Offer will be determined on expiry of the offer period and published in accordance with section 21(3) of the Danish Takeover Order.

    Nykredit intends to delist Spar Nord Bank from trading on Nasdaq Copenhagen and complete a compulsory acquisition of the remaining Spar Nord Bank shareholders, provided that Nykredit has obtained the necessary ownership interest, and the Offer has been completed. Spar Nord Bank shareholders who have opted not to accept the Offer, should expect that Nykredit, provided that the Offer is completed, will take steps to combine Nykredit Bank A/S and Spar Nord Bank, which will result in a further increase in Nykredit’s ownership interest in Spar Nord Bank. Not later than in continuation of the combination, Nykredit thus expects to hold a sufficient ownership interest to be able to delist Spar Nord Bank from trading on Nasdaq Copenhagen and complete a compulsory acquisition of the remaining Spar Nord Bank shareholders.

    The full terms and conditions of the Offer are contained in the Offer Document as amended by the Supplement. The Offer Document and the Supplement are published in the Danish FSA’s OAM database: https://oam.finanstilsynet.dk/ and can also, with certain restrictions, be accessed at https://www.nykredit.com/kobstilbud-spar-nord/ and https://www.sparnord.dk/investor-relations/overtagelsestilbud.

    About Spar Nord Bank

    Spar Nord Bank was founded in 1824 and is now a nationwide bank with 58 branches. Spar Nord Bank offers all types of financial services, consultancy and products, focusing its business on retail customers and primarily small and medium-sized enterprises (SMEs) in the local areas in which the bank is represented. The bank is also focused on leasing operations and large corporate customers, which are both business areas handled by the head offices.

    Spar Nord Bank has historically been rooted in northern Jutland and continues to be a market leader in this region. However, in the period from 2002 to 2024, Spar Nord Bank has established and acquired branches outside northern Jutland. Over the course of the years, the bank has adjusted its branch network in an ongoing process and now has a nationwide distribution network comprising 58 branches. These 58 branches are distributed on 32 banking areas, each of which is headed by a manager reporting directly to the bank’s executive board.

    The Spar Nord Bank Group consists of two earnings entities: Spar Nord Bank’s branches and the Trading Division. As an entity, the Trading Division serves customers from Spar Nord Bank’s branches as well as large retail customers and institutional clients in the field of equities, bonds, fixed income and forex products, asset management and international transactions. Finally, under the concept Sparxpres, the bank offers consumer loans to personal customers through Sparxpres’ platform as well as debt consolidation loans and consumer financing via retail stores and gift voucher solutions via shopping centres and city associations.

    About Nykredit

    Nykredit Realkredit A/S (“Nykredit”) is a public limited company incorporated under the laws of Denmark, company reg. (CVR) no. 12 71 92 80, having its registered office at Sundkrogsgade 25, 2150 Nordhavn, Denmark. Nykredit is a mortgage credit institution and, together with its wholly-owned subsidiary Totalkredit A/S, is a market leader of the Danish mortgage credit market with a market share of some 45.2 per cent. Nykredit offers mortgage financing for private individuals and businesses.

    Nykredit is part of the Nykredit Group, which historically dates back to 1851. In addition to carrying on mortgage credit business, the Group carries on banking business through Nykredit Bank – including banking and wealth management operations – and has a total of around 4,000 employees in Denmark.

    Nykredit is owned by an association of the Nykredit Group’s customers, Forenet Kredit. Forenet Kredit owns close to 80 per cent of Nykredit’s shares. Other major shareholders are five Danish pension funds: Akademikernes Pension AP Pension, PensionDanmark, PFA and PKA.

    Nykredit is known for the advantages offered through the association. Forenet Kredit makes capital contributions to the Nykredit Group when times are good, and Nykredit has decided to pass these on to its customers.

    Since, 2017, Forenet Kredit has paid over DKK 8 billion in capital contributions to the Nykredit Group, and in the period to 2027, Forenet Kredit has provided a further DKK 7 billion.

    Questions and further information

    Any questions concerning the Offer may be directed to:

    Nykredit Bank A/S

    Company reg. (CVR) no.: 10 51 96 08

    Sundkrogsgade 25

    2150 Nordhavn
    Denmark

    Telephone: +45 7010 9000

    and

    Carnegie Investment Bank

    Filial af Carnegie Investment Bank AB (publ), Sverige

    Company reg. (CVR) no. 35 52 12 67

    Overgaden Neden Vandet 9B

    1414 Copenhagen K
    Denmark

    E-mail: annette.hansen@carnegie.dk

    For further information about the Offer, please see: https://www.nykredit.com/kobstilbud-spar-nord/.

    This announcement and the Offer Document (with supplements) are not directed at shareholders of Spar Nord Bank A/S whose participation in the Offer would require the issuance of an offer document, registration or activities other than what is required under Danish law (and, in the case of shareholders in the United States of America, Section 14(e) of, and applicable provisions of Regulation 14E promulgated under, the US Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended). The Offer is not made and will not be made, directly or indirectly, to shareholders resident in any jurisdiction in which the submission of the Offer or acceptance thereof would be in contravention of the laws of such jurisdiction. Any person coming into possession of this announcement, the Offer Document or any other document containing a reference to the Offer is expected and assumed to independently obtain all necessary information about any applicable restrictions and to observe these.

    This announcement does not constitute an offer or an invitation to purchase securities or a solicitation of an offer to purchase securities in accordance with the Offer or otherwise. The Offer will be submitted only in the form of the Offer Document (with supplements) approved by the FSA, which sets out the full terms and conditions of the Offer, including information on how to accept the Offer. The shareholders of Spar Nord Bank are advised to read the Offer Document and any related documents as they contain important information.

    Restricted jurisdictions

    The Offer is not made, and acceptance of the Offer to tender Spar Nord Bank shares is not accepted, neither directly nor indirectly, in or from any jurisdiction in which the making or acceptance of the Offer would not be in compliance with the laws of such jurisdiction or would require any registration, approval or any other measures with any regulatory authority not expressly contemplated by the Offer Document (the “Restricted Jurisdictions”). Neither the United States nor the United Kingdom is a Restricted Jurisdiction.

    Restricted Jurisdictions include, but are not limited to: Australia, Canada, Hong Kong, Japan, New Zealand and South Africa.

    Persons obtaining documents or information relating to the Offer (including custodians, account holding institutions, nominees, trustees, representatives, fiduciaries or other intermediaries) should not distribute, communicate, transfer or send these in or into a Restricted Jurisdiction or use mail or any other means of communication in or into a Restricted Jurisdiction in connection with the Offer. Persons (including, but not limited to, custodians, custodian banks, nominees, trustees, representatives, fiduciaries or other intermediaries) intending to communicate this announcement, the Supplement, the Offer Document or any related document to any jurisdiction outside Denmark or the United States should inform themselves about these restrictions before taking any action. Any failure to comply with these restrictions may constitute a violation of the laws of such jurisdiction, including securities laws. It is the responsibility of all Persons obtaining this announcement, the Supplement, the Offer Document, earlier supplements, an acceptance form and/or other documents relating to the Offer, or into whose possession such documents otherwise come, to inform themselves about and observe all such restrictions.

    Nykredit is not responsible for ensuring that the distribution, dissemination or communication of this announcement, the Supplement or the Offer Document to shareholders outside Denmark, the United States and the United Kingdom is consistent with applicable law in any jurisdiction other than Denmark, the United States and the United Kingdom.

    Important Information for Shareholders in the United States

    The Offer concerns the shares in Spar Nord Bank, a public limited liability company incorporated and admitted to trading on a regulated market in Denmark, and is subject to the disclosure and procedural requirements of Danish law, including the Danish capital markets act and the Danish takeover order.

    The Offer is being made to shareholders in Spar Nord Bank in the United States in compliance with the applicable US tender offer rules under the U.S. Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, (the “U.S. Exchange Act”), including Regulation 14E promulgated thereunder, subject to the relief available for a “Tier II” tender offer, and otherwise in accordance with the requirements of Danish law and practice

    Accordingly, US Spar Nord Bank shareholders should be aware that this announcement and any other documents regarding the Offer have been prepared in accordance with, and will be subject to, the disclosure and other procedural requirements, including with respect to withdrawal rights, the Offer timetable, settlement procedures and timing of payments of Danish law and practice, which may differ materially from those applicable under US domestic tender offer law and practice. In addition, the financial information contained in this announcement or the Offer Document has not been prepared in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles in the United States, or derived therefrom, and may therefore differ from, or not be comparable with, financial information of US companies.

    In accordance with the laws of, and practice in, Denmark and to the extent permitted by applicable law, including Rule 14e-5 under the U.S. Exchange Act, Nykredit, Nykredit’s affiliates or any nominees or brokers of the foregoing (acting as agents, or in a similar capacity, for Nykredit or any of its affiliates, as applicable) may from time to time, and other than pursuant to the Offer, directly or indirectly, purchase, or arrange to purchase, outside of the United States, shares in Spar Nord Bank or any securities that are convertible into, exchangeable for or exercisable for such shares in Spar Nord Bank before or during the period in which the Offer remains open for acceptance. These purchases may occur either in the open market at prevailing prices or in private transactions at negotiated prices. Any information about such purchases will be announced via Nasdaq Copenhagen and relevant electronic media if, and to the extent, such announcement is required under applicable law. To the extent information about such purchases or arrangements to purchase is made public in Denmark, such information will be disclosed by means of a press release or other means reasonably calculated to inform US shareholders of Spar Nord Bank of such information.

    In addition, subject to the applicable laws of Denmark and US securities laws, including Rule 14e-5 under the U.S. Exchange Act, the financial advisers to Nykredit or their respective affiliates may also engage in ordinary course trading activities in securities of Spar Nord Bank, which may include purchases or arrangements to purchase such securities.

    It may not be possible for US shareholders to effect service of process within the United States upon Spar Nord Bank, Nykredit or any of their respective affiliates, or their respective officers or directors, some or all of which may reside outside the United States, or to enforce against any of them judgments of the United States courts predicated upon the civil liability provisions of the federal securities laws of the United States or other US law. It may not be possible to bring an action against Nykredit, Spar Nord Bank and/or their respective officers or directors (as applicable) in a non-US court for violations of US laws. Further, it may not be possible to compel Nykredit and Spar Nord Bank or their respective affiliates, as applicable, to subject themselves to the judgment of a US court. In addition, it may be difficult to enforce in Denmark original actions, or actions for the enforcement of judgments of US courts, based on the civil liability provisions of the US federal securities laws.

    The Offer, if completed, may have consequences under US federal income tax and under applicable US state and local, as well as non-US, tax laws. Each shareholder of Spar Nord Bank is urged to consult its independent professional adviser immediately regarding the tax consequences of the Offer.

    NEITHER THE U.S. SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION NOR ANY SECURITIES COMMISSION OR OTHER REGULATORY AUTHORITY IN ANY STATE OF THE U.S. HAS APPROVED OR DECLINED TO APPROVE THE OFFER OR THIS ANNOUNCEMENT, PASSED UPON THE FAIRNESS OR MERITS OF THE OFFER OR PROVIDED AN OPINION AS TO THE ACCURACY OR COMPLETENESS OF THIS ANNOUNCEMENT OR ANY OFFER DOCUMENT. ANY REPRESENTATION TO THE CONTRARY IS A CRIMINAL OFFENCE IN THE UNITED STATES.


    1 Executive Order no. 636 of 15 May 2020

    Attachments

    The MIL Network

  • MIL-OSI: Philipp Rüede appointed CEO SCOR L&H and Member of SCOR’s Executive Committee

    Source: GlobeNewswire (MIL-OSI)

    Press release
    23 April 2025 – N° 08

    Philipp Rüede appointed CEO SCOR L&H 
    and Member of SCOR’s Executive Committee

    We are pleased to announce Philipp Rüede as the new CEO SCOR Life & Health and a Member of the Executive Committee. Philipp is replacing Frieder Knüpling who stepped down in July 2024. Philipp’s immediate priorities will be to drive the L&H new business strategy, to protect and deliver the in-force value, and to improve the cash profile of the L&H business, in line with the updated L&H strategy unveiled at our Investor Day in December 2024.

    Philipp Rüede, a dual Swiss and German citizen, is a graduate of the Ecole Polytechnique in Paris and holds a Master’s degree in Engineering from the Swiss Federal Institute of Technology (ETH Zürich). He has more than 20 years of experience in Banking and Reinsurance. Philipp began his career in 1999, in the Equity Derivatives Structuring and Trading department at Bank Vontobel in Zurich. From 2000 to 2010, he was Global Co-Head of Equity Derivatives Structuring at CS First Boston, splitting his time between the Zurich and Hong Kong offices. In 2010, he became a Partner at the Swiss electronic trading company Arbillon Capital AG. Moving into the reinsurance industry in 2013, he joined Swiss Re in Zurich as Head of Reinsurance Capital Management, overseeing the optimization of capital efficiency within the Group. From 2015 to 2019, he led a dedicated team of more than 75 professionals as Global Head of P&C Structured Solutions. In 2019, he was appointed Head of the newly formed Alternative Capital Partners team, collaborating across P&C and L&H (re)insurance lines to proactively manage risk limits and enhance the company’s flexible capital structure.

    Philipp will take up his position on 1 June 2025.

    Thierry Léger, Chief Executive Officer of SCOR, comments: “Philipp will bring very valuable and complementary skills to SCOR. With his extensive experience and wide-ranging expertise, Philipp has all the qualities required to continue the transformation of our L&H business, restore its profitability, and improve its cash profile. The whole Executive Committee joins me in welcoming Philipp and wishing him every success in his new responsibilities.”

    *

    *        *

    SCOR, a leading global reinsurer

    As a leading global reinsurer, SCOR offers its clients a diversified and innovative range of reinsurance and insurance solutions and services to control and manage risk. Applying “The Art & Science of Risk,” SCOR uses its industry-recognized expertise and cutting-edge financial solutions to serve its clients and contribute to the welfare and resilience of society.

    The Group generated premiums of EUR 20.1 billion in 2024 and serves clients in more than 150 countries from its 37 offices worldwide.

    For more information, visit: www.scor.com

    Media Relations
    Alexandre Garcia
    media@scor.com

    Investor Relations
    Thomas Fossard
    InvestorRelations@scor.com

    Follow us on LinkedIn

     

    All content published by the SCOR group since January 1, 2024, is certified with Wiztrust. You can check the authenticity of this content at wiztrust.com.

    Attachment

    The MIL Network

  • MIL-OSI: Sterling Trading Tech Names Julie Armstrong Chief Commercial Officer

    Source: GlobeNewswire (MIL-OSI)

    Chicago , April 23, 2025 (GLOBE NEWSWIRE) — Sterling Trading Tech (Sterling), a leading global provider of technology in order management, risk and margin, and trading, announced today the appointment of Julie Armstrong as Chief Commercial Officer, a newly created role that underscores the firm’s commitment to scaling its business globally. This strategic hire signals Sterling’s transition into its next phase of accelerated growth, building on recent momentum across new client segments, product innovation, asset expansion, and geographic reach.

    Armstrong, a recognized industry expert, brings decades of experience in global fintech strategy and revenue generation. She will lead Sterling’s expansion into evolving market segments worldwide and will implement strategic revenue initiatives across the firm’s OMS, Risk and Margin, and Trading Platforms, covering all asset classes globally.

    Previously, Armstrong served as an Independent Board Member, and later as Chief Commercial Officer at ChartIQ. Prior to that she was Executive Director, Global Head of Market Technology Services at the CME Group Inc. (Nasdaq: CME), where she led co-location, connectivity and software trading services while overseeing market data sales. She is known for launching CME’s Tech Talk series and held a Board role while helping to ignite the Women’s Initiative Network during her eight years at the Exchange. Early in her career, Armstrong was VP, Head of U.S. Sales and Implementations at RealTick (now EZE Software, a unit of SS&C Technologies [Nasdaq: SSNC]).

    Said Sterling Trading Tech President & CEO Jen Nayar: “Sterling is entering a transformational period in its evolution. We’ve made major investments in product innovation and infrastructure to support institutional growth and global expansion. Julie’s appointment is essential to our revenue efforts. She is the ideal executive to anticipate increased demands by new segments and to expand our franchise in the industry. With her joining, the executive team – now fully in place – can capture increased market share across all industry participants.”

    Armstrong commented, “The firm is uniquely positioned as a next-generation infrastructure provider in the financial markets. This is an incredible opportunity to contribute to the growth and scalability of an organization that is already making such a profound impact in our industry. I am deeply committed to driving exceptional results and collaborating with the talented team here to foster innovation and build upon the company’s success. I am excited for the journey ahead and eager to bring my experience to this pivotal role.”

    -END-

    About Sterling Trading Tech
    Sterling Trading Tech (Sterling) is a leading provider of professional trading technology solutions for the global equities, equity options and futures markets. With over 100 clients including leading brokers, clearing firms and prop groups in over 20 countries, Sterling provides solutions tailored to clients’ needs. Sterling is committed to providing fast, stable technology along with outstanding customer service. Sterling provides trading platforms, OMS and risk products to its clients.

    Media Contact:
    Magdalena Mayer
    magdalena.mayer@sterlingtradingtech.com
    (312) 346-9600

    The MIL Network

  • MIL-OSI: Q1 2025 Trading Update and Invitation to Earnings Call

    Source: GlobeNewswire (MIL-OSI)

    Oslo, 23 April 2025 – DNO ASA, the Norwegian oil and gas operator, will publish its Q1 2025 operating and interim financial results on 15 May at 07:00 (CET). A videoconference call with executive management will follow at 14:00 (CET). Today the Company provides an update on production, sales volumes and other selected information for the quarter.

    Volumes (boepd) 

    Gross operated production Q1 2025 Q4 2024 Q1 2024
    Kurdistan 82,081 74,163 76,310
    North Sea 8,864 6,602
           
    Net entitlement production Q1 2025 Q4 2024 Q1 2024
    Kurdistan 18,464 17,424 20,503
    North Sea 19,296 19,031 14,217
           
    Sales Q1 2025 Q4 2024 Q1 2024
    Kurdistan 18,464 17,424 20,503
    North Sea 16,981 17,088 17,710
           
    Equity accounted production (net) Q1 2025 Q4 2024 Q1 2024
    Côte d’Ivoire         3,375 2,994 3,323

    Selected cash flow items

    DNO’s share of crude oil from the Tawke license during the quarter has been sold to local buyers as the Iraq-Türkiye Pipeline remained closed. All payments are made in advance of loadings with the vast majority transferred directly into DNO’s international bank accounts.

    In the first quarter, DNO paid a dividend of NOK 0.3125 per share (totaling USD 27.4 million), which represents NOK 1.25 per share on an annualized basis. The Company had no tax payments or refunds during the quarter.

    In early March, DNO announced the transformative acquisition of Sval Energi Group AS and DNO subsequently paid a deposit of USD 22.5 million to the seller. The transaction is expected to be completed mid-year 2025.

    Also in March, DNO completed the private placement of USD 600 million of new five-year senior unsecured bonds. The early redemption of another bond, DNO04 (originally maturing in 2026), was completed on 10 April and did not impact the Q1 2025 cash flow.

    North Sea exploration

    DNO participated in two discoveries on the Norwegian Continental Shelf in the quarter, with combined recoverable resources of 26 million barrels of oil equivalent net to DNO (mid-points of ranges). The Mistral well in PL1119 (10 percent interest) was spudded on 22 December and completed on 25 March, and the operated Kjøttkake well (including a sidetrack) in PL1182 S (40 percent interest) was spudded on 26 January and completed on 27 March. A third well, Horatio in PL1109 (20 percent interest), was spudded on 5 February, completed on 22 March, and was dry.

    Earnings call login details

    Please visit www.dno.no for login details ahead of the call.

    Disclaimer

    The information contained in this release is based on a preliminary assessment of the Company’s Q1 2025 operating and interim financial results and may be subject to change.

    For further information, please contact:
    Media: media@dno.no
    Investors: investor.relations@dno.no

    DNO ASA is a Norwegian oil and gas operator active in the Middle East, the North Sea and West Africa. Founded in 1971 and listed on the Oslo Stock Exchange, the Company holds stakes in onshore and offshore licenses at various stages of exploration, development and production in the Kurdistan region of Iraq, Norway, the United Kingdom, Côte d’Ivoire, Netherlands and Yemen. More information is available at www.dno.no

    This information is subject to the disclosure requirements pursuant to section 5-12 of the Norwegian Securities Trading Act.

    The MIL Network

  • MIL-Evening Report: Rather than short-term fixes, communities need flexible plans to prepare for a range of likely climate impacts

    Source: The Conversation (Au and NZ) – By Tom Logan, Senior Lecturer Above the Bar of Civil Systems Engineering, University of Canterbury

    Dave Rowland/Getty Images

    As New Zealanders clean up after ex-Cyclone Tam which left thousands without power and communities once again facing flooding, it’s tempting to seek immediate solutions.

    However, after the cleanup and initial recovery, careful planning is essential.

    Research shows that following disasters, communities often demand visible action that appears decisive. Yet, these reactions can create more problems than they solve.

    When high-impact weather events drive long-term policy decisions, we risk implementing changes that seem protective but actually increase the risk of future disasters or misallocate limited resources.

    What New Zealand needs isn’t knee-jerk actions but thoughtful planning that prepares communities before the next storms strike. Risk assessments paired with adaptive planning offer a path forward to build resilience step by step.

    Planning ahead with multiple options

    The good news is that many councils in New Zealand have begun this process and communities across the country are due to receive climate change risk assessments. These aren’t just technical documents showing hazard areas – they are tools that put power in the hands of communities.

    When communities have access to good information about which neighbourhoods, roads and infrastructure face potential risks, they can prioritise investments in protection, modify building practices where needed and, in some cases, plan for different futures. This knowledge creates options rather than fear.

    A risk assessment is merely the first step. Adaptation plans that translate knowledge into action are the next, but the Climate Change Commission recently confirmed there is a gap, concluding that:

    New Zealand is not adapting to climate change fast enough.

    For many New Zealanders already experiencing “rain anxiety” with each approaching storm, simply naming the danger without offering a path forward isn’t enough. This is where adaptive planning becomes essential.

    Adaptive planning isn’t about abandoning coastal towns tomorrow or spending billions on sea walls today. It is about having a plan A, B and C ready if or when nature forces our hand. Rather than demanding immediate, potentially costly actions, adaptive planning provides a roadmap with multiple pathways that adjust as climate conditions evolve. This is how we best manage complex risk.

    Think of it as setting up trip wires: when water reaches certain levels or storms hit certain frequencies, we already know our next move. This approach acknowledges the deep uncertainty of climate change while still providing communities with clarity about what happens next.

    Importantly, it builds in community consultation at each decision point, ensuring solutions reflect local values and priorities.

    Several communities are already considering plans that combine risk assessment with several adaptation options.
    Getty Images

    Success stories

    Several New Zealand communities are already demonstrating how this approach works. Christchurch recently approved an adaptation strategy for Whakaraupō Lyttelton Harbour with clear pathways based on trigger points rather than fixed timelines.

    In South Dunedin, where half of the city’s buildings currently face flood risks which are expected to worsen in coming decades, the city council has paired its risk assessment with seven potential adaptation futures, ranging from status quo to large-scale retreat. Rather than imposing solutions, they’re consulting residents about what they want for their neighbourhoods.

    Similarly forward-thinking, Buller District Council has developed a master plan that includes potentially relocating parts of Westport in the future. It’s a bold strategy that acknowledges reality rather than clinging to false security.

    Status quo feels safer than adaptation

    These approaches aren’t without controversy. At recent public meetings in Buller, some residents voiced understandable concerns about property values and community disruption. These reactions reflect the very real emotional and financial stakes for people whose homes are affected.

    Yet the alternative – continuing with the status quo – means flood victims are offered only the option to invest their insurance money wherever they like. This assumes insurance remains available, which is a misguided assumption as insurance retreat from climate-vulnerable properties accelerates.

    However, while local councils are on the front lines of adaptation planning, they’re being asked to make transformational decisions without adequate central government support. A recent Parliamentary select committee report failed to clarify who should pay for adaptation measures, despite acknowledging significant risks.

    Parliament continues to avoid the difficult questions, kicking the can further down the road while communities such as South Dunedin and Westport face immediate threats.

    Local councils need more than vague guidelines. They need clear direction on funding responsibilities, legislative powers and technical support. Without this support, even the most detailed risk assessments become exercises in documenting vulnerability rather than building resilience.

    Instead of demanding short-term fixes, residents should expect their councils to engage with these complex challenges. The best climate preparation isn’t about predicting exactly what will happen in 2100 or avoiding disaster. It is about building more resilient, cohesive communities that are prepared for whatever our changing climate brings.

    Tom Logan is a Rutherford Discovery Fellow and the chief technical officer of Urban Intelligence. He receives funding from the Ministry of Business, Innovation and Employment and EU Horizons on risk assessment. He is affiliated with the International Society for Risk Analysis.

    ref. Rather than short-term fixes, communities need flexible plans to prepare for a range of likely climate impacts – https://theconversation.com/rather-than-short-term-fixes-communities-need-flexible-plans-to-prepare-for-a-range-of-likely-climate-impacts-254698

    MIL OSI AnalysisEveningReport.nz

  • MIL-OSI New Zealand: Speech to Nelson Tasman Chamber of Commerce

    Source: New Zealand Government

    Tēnā koutou katoa. Nga mihi ki nga manawhenua o tenie rohe  me nga waka katoa ki tae mai nei.

    Good afternoon everyone.

    Thank you for the opportunity to be here today.

    I want to acknowledge the work the Nelson Tasman Chamber of Commerce does. 

    And I want to acknowledge the Nelson Tasman business community. You are at the heart of your communities, creating jobs, generating income for locals and producing a diverse range of goods and services.

    I always enjoy visiting Nelson and have enjoyed many visits here since becoming an MP.  Your local Mayor and Former MP Nick Smith has made sure of that!  

    But my first iconic Nelson-Tasman experience was not in fact a  Nick Smith related one. 

    I have especially fond memories of kayaking and hiking through the Abel Tasman National Park around 20 years ago with my then boyfriend – now husband – and being dazzled by its majesty, complete with frolicking baby seals, enthusiastic trampers playing 500 in the huts. A Thai green curry and cold beer providing a grand finale at what I think must have been the Park Café Mārahau. 

    My personally memorable experience is not unique. 

    The Nelson Tasman region is a really special part of New Zealand. That’s demonstrated by the number of people who choose to visit here – from around the country and the world, and the number of migrants who choose to move here and make this place home. 

    Like many other areas of the country, the communities of this region are facing both exciting economic opportunities and a range of economic challenges.  

    On the one hand there is so much to feel optimistic about, from your thriving and diverse food and beverage sector, the growing and potential-filled blue economy, your leadership in forestry and wood product manufacturing, and your growing visitor economy, all of which sustain jobs and incomes today and have the ability to deliver even more in future.  

    These growing industries are good news for the future of people here, and, beyond that, will help New Zealand earn the additional revenue we need to fund great health care, education services and physical infrastructure. Like the Hope Bypass, upgrades to Nelson Hospital and repairs to local schools.  

    I’ve had the pleasure today of visiting some of the people leading in these sectors: I spent time at the Cawthron Aquaculture Park and felt excited by their vision for driving forward the Government’s goal of quadrupling the size of the aquaculture sector over the next decade.

    I visited Trinder Engineering and was wowed by their commitment to research, innovation and a positive workplace culture.

    And I visited Pic’s Peanut Butter:  whose story began with a product made in a concrete mixer winning over die-hard fans at the Nelson Farmer’s Market and has now expanded to produce 25,000 jars a day for peanut butter lovers the world over.

    There are good news stories like this across New Zealand, and I think we should all do more to celebrate our great Kiwi success stories.  

    These successes came about because of clever, brave people who decided to take a risk, to take a loan to invest in big ideas, to work hard to make things happen, to hire good people and offer them meaningful careers, to pursue a vision and keep going in the face of adversity.  

    In doing so, these enterprises, and the hundreds like them across Nelson and New Zealand, have supported thousands of people into good jobs, providing income for their families and investments for their communities.  

    They’ve also paid a lot of tax along the way – which has allowed the Government to increase its annual investments in schools, health services, superannuation support, and other essential public services.  

    That contribution by business and hard working taxpayers too often goes unacknowledged:  We all have hopes for new investments and better services, but before we dream up new ways of spending, we first need to collectively earn the dollars required to sustainably fund that spending. 

    Growing regional economies, and successful local businesses are vital to that equation.  Put simply: To deliver the kind of country we all want – with better living standards, better opportunities for our kids and more financially secure families, Nelson and New Zealand needs more success stories like Cawthorn, Trinder and Pic’s.  

    That’s why our Government is so focused on delivering policies that support economic productivity and that give entrepreneurs, employers and firms the confidence they need to invest, hire, expand and grow.  

    That includes getting the basics right, such as low and stable inflation, manageable interest rates and credible fiscal management.  

    It means ensuring the Government doesn’t make it harder to do business by tying people up in red tape, endless consent processes, or sticking rigidly to rules that simply don’t make sense. 

    These sensible policy approaches are the base from which we will deliver better choices and investments in the years ahead.  

    I have enormous optimism in New Zealand’s economic growth potential.  

    We are a safe, secure country with established trading relationships and a global reputation as a good place to do business.  

    We are blessed with abundant natural resources – everything from ocean to freshwater, fertile land to minerals and temperate weather.  

    In a world worried about food security, we feed more than 40 million people with levels of efficiency and sustainability that are the envy of the world.  

    We have a long history of stable democracy, strong institutions and rule of law.  

    We’ve produced world-leading scientific breakthroughs, send rockets to space and continue to produce some of the world’s best digital effects.

    There are many reasons for New Zealand to be optimistic that better times are ahead.  

    Even so, I’m not a total Pollyanna.  

    I’m conscious of the challenging economic circumstances many people in Nelson, and around the country for that matter, have experienced in the past few years and in some cases continue to experience.  

    Local employers and households have come through a post-Covid period of very high inflation and rapidly rising interest rates. 

    High inflation and high interest rates aren’t just numbers for economists – they’ve had big human impacts:  elevating the cost of living, and putting a handbrake on business activity, with significant impacts for people’s jobs and incomes.  

    Our country has also been left with a sea of debt and red-ink in the Government books that will take time to repair.  

    The post-Covid ‘structural deficit’ has left a big gap between what the country needs to fund to deliver on the spending commitments we’ve made and what we need to earn to pay for that spending. 

    In effect, the Government is borrowing billions to bridge the gap, with a $13 billion deficit this year and forecasters anticipating deficits in future years too.  

    That obviously can’t go on forever, or else our kids and grandkids will be left with unsustainable debt and considerable economic uncertainty.  

    That’s why our Government is working carefully to bring the country’s finances back into balance: so we can start to pay down our debt and create better buffers for the future.  

    We want to ensure New Zealand is financially strong and resilient enough to effectively respond to whatever the future may throw at us: be it earthquakes, extreme climatic events or other events outside our control. 

    Restoring that fiscal balance, while continuing to increase investment in essential front line public services, requires careful prioritisation and some tough – but unavoidable –  choices.

    Believe me – I too would love the freedom to throw today’s Budget constraints out the door – but I’m always conscious that the dollars we spend today eventually need to be repaid.  Freedom today could mean serfdom tomorrow.

    The good news is that New Zealand has in recent months been turning the corner in our post-Covid recovery.  

    Inflation has been brought back under control, interest rates have dropped 200 basis points, exports have been growing, commodity prices have improved, tourists have been returning and business and consumer confidence has been on the up.  

    That growth is positive for Kiwis’ jobs and incomes and for the Government’s books.  It provided a welcome backdrop as the Government started putting together this year’s Budget.  

    But, there’s a but. As you know, the world economy is now facing further headwinds, with United States trade policy changes, counter-tariffs, retaliatory measures, tariff pauses and still unfolding estimates of what this could all mean for global and regional growth.  

    Uncertainty abounds.

    The impacts for New Zealand are twofold.  

    On the one hand, there is the first-order impact for our exporters who now face the prospect of higher tariffs being charged for them to export their goods to the US.  

    I know many exporters are finding it very difficult to see through the noise and plan for what might lie around the corner for them.  

    I think for example of the wine exporters of the Nelson-Marlborough region, who are nervous about the many implications different tariff regimes could have for their existing customers and for the way wine is traded around the world.  Will they be competing with more European wine in the UK?  Will they be better placed in a relative sense in the US?  

    It’s simply too soon for wine exporters to know and this makes it very difficult for them to plan.  

    Direct tariff impacts may well be uneven from firm to firm, sector to sector and market to market.  

    There will inevitably be both swings and roundabouts. For example, I spoke to a beverage manufacturer in Wellington last week who’d just taken a large order from China, as importers there were looking to find alternatives to US products which they expect will carry much higher tariffs into the future.  

    The Government has moved swiftly to gather the best possible information and insights about these unfolding implications for our exporters, relying on our incredible network of diplomats and representatives around the world.  

    Officials are addressing queries from exporters, have hotlines established, are delivering information webinars and are working with individual firms to help them understand the practical implications of tariffs, including for firms who have manufacturing in third countries or product already en-route to the US.  

    New Zealand Trade and Enterprise is currently providing tailored support to a group of 1000 larger exporters, including access to their in-market staff, their network of private sector exporters and financial advice.    

    For now, most business appear to be looking to navigate through the initial uncertainty rather than making dramatic changes in response.

    The Government will keep providing exporters with information and advisory support and assess impacts as more certain information becomes available.

    Beyond direct tariff effects, the second-order impact for the New Zealand economy is what forecasters are now predicting will be more financial uncertainty, potentially increased inflation pressure and a lower growth trajectory for the global economy and many of the countries with which New Zealand trades.  

    These are just forecasts at this stage, and, once again the actual impacts are still unclear.  Put simply though: all these developments will make New Zealand’s economic recovery harder.  

    We can’t wish that away.  

    What we can do is focus on the things we can control.  

    This means it is more important than ever that New Zealand offers a predictable, steady approach to our economic and fiscal management.  

    In an unstable world we need to stay the course with responsible policies that provide stability, support investment and make us an attractive place for the world to trade and do business with.  

    New Zealand has the opportunity to position ourselves as a safe haven, and to continue our long history of honouring existing trade agreements and forging new ones.  

    Earlier this year, well before “Liberation Day”, I released the Government’s Going for Growth framework which sets out 88 policy actions to do just that.  These actions are grouped under the Government’s five key thematic growth pillars.  

    Promoting global trade and investment was a key pillar then and it’s a key pillar now.  

    Our goal is to double the value of New Zealand exports within a decade so we are working to grow and strengthen our trade relationships around the world. 

    The Prime Minister kicked off the year in Dubai signing a new trade agreement with the United Arab Emirates and trade talks with India, soon to be the world’s third largest economy, are underway.

    At the same time, we are making it much easier for New Zealand to benefit from international capital and investment. 

    A new agency, Invest NZ, is being established to welcome international investment into New Zealand, and the Overseas Investment Act is being reformed to make it easier for businesses to receive new investment, grow and pay higher wages.  

    There are four additional pillars in the Government’s Going for Growth agenda:

    • Developing talent
    • Competitive business settings
    • Innovation, technology and science; and
    • Infrastructure for growth

    I encourage you to check out the full plan online but let me make just a few remarks about each.  

    Developing talent:  This is about making the most of our most important asset, human capital, getting back to basics and arresting the woeful decline in the literacy and numeracy skills of our school leavers. 

     We simply can’t be the wealthy country we want to be if too many of our school leavers emerge from the school system without the basic skills they need to succeed in the modern world. 

    We’ve already acted to stop the slide and re-introduced structured literacy and maths to our schools, ensuring kids are receiving instruction in ways that work.  We’re bringing practical knowledge and skills back to the curriculum and reporting on performance. 

    At the same time, we’re tuning-up our vocational education system to make it more responsive to industry and regional needs, and to ensure people wanting to acquire skills for a new trade or industry have good choices for upskilling. This means ensuring institutions like the Nelson Marlborough Institute of Technology can be locally nimble and responsive.  

    Competitive business settings:  This is about both cutting red tape and ensuring we have rules that foster competition between big firms to deliver a better deal for New Zealand consumers. 

    In my view, in recent years New Zealand has in too many areas of life become stultifyingly risk-averse, and we now have a spaghetti of costly and complex rules and regulations that are holding back sensible development and clever ideas.  

    The Government has already zeroed in on a key target in this regard: the Resource Management Act.  

    We’ve passed a new fast-track law to bypass the burdensome court process and accelerate the yes for dozens of major projects that, if approved through a streamlined panel process, will drive jobs and growth across the country.  

    In this region, three projects have been identified as potential fast-track initiatives.  

    They include the Hope Bypass, already confirmed as a Road of National Significance in our land transport plan, with a proposal to alter the existing designation and acquire additional land outside that designation. 

    They also include the Maitahi Village housing development, including plans for a commercial centre and retirement village.  I’m advised that this project is already being progressed through the fast-track panel process, with final decisions still pending.  

    The Mapua Housing Development, is also listed as a fast-track project with potential to enter the process. I’m advised that project would include up to 320 residential allotments, a recreational reserve, a community amenities building and parking, a wetland and restoration of the Season Valley stream.   

    Beyond the fast-track process we are also working at pace 

    to replace the Resource Management Act as a whole.  

    We’re advised our plans will deliver a 45 per cent reduction in administrative and compliance costs. 

    We’ve also worked quickly to lessen the regulatory burden on the agricultural sector. We back farmers, and we don’t want unwieldy rules stopping them making sensible decisions for their farming businesses.

    Reform of the Health and Safety at Work Act is underway to reduce box ticking exercises and compliance costs. 

    The other aspect of this work is in the competition space. 

    Everyday Kiwis, visiting OECD economists and Ministers around our Cabinet table share concerns about the concentration of large businesses in some of our major industries, with mounting evidence that competition has suffered as a result, and that New Zealand consumers are missing out on a fair deal.

    You’ll probably have noticed that we’re acting to improve competition in the banking and grocery sectors and we’ll have more to say about those as well as other sectors in the coming months. 

    Innovation, technology and science:  This is about not only the Government’s investment in science but also the steps we’re taking to make it easier for businesses and industries to pursue their own innovation agendas. 

    Government science institutions are being streamlined into four much more commercially focused entities that will ensure our taxpayer investment in science is connected with the needs of a growing economy.  

    We’re also thinking hard about what we can do to incentivise New Zealand businesses to invest in the new machinery, technology and equipment that will lift productivity in the years ahead.  

    We know that faster-growing countries tend to have more ‘capital intensity’ in their businesses, which helps drive productivity.  I’m keen to unlock more of that in New Zealand and am considering the best ways to support it.

    Finally, infrastructure for growth. Roads, ports, hospitals, schools and more. 

    New Zealand has an infrastructure deficit that is reducing productivity and living standards. 

    We need to catch up with the rest of the world when it comes to how we plan, fund and build modern infrastructure.  

    We are putting together a 30 year National Infrastructure Plan and a new national infrastructure agency.  Just last week we released New Zealand’s first health infrastructure plan, which sets out a national, long-term approach to renewing and expanding the country’s public health facilities.  

    Instead of building single, large-scale structures, the plan proposes a staged approach – delivering smaller, more manageable facilities in phases. This will mean patients benefit from modern healthcare environments sooner, while providing greater certainty around delivery timeframes and costs.  

    And yes, rest assured, redeveloping Nelson Hospital is a key priority for the Government. Work is already underway to expand the Emergency Department at Nelson Hospital, and earthquake strengthening of the George Mason Building is also underway. The $10.6 million ED expansion project is designed to meet the growing demand for emergency care in the area as part of the wider redevelopment programme for the hospital.

    The Health Infrastructure Plan highlights the need for increased bed capacity at Nelson Hospital, earthquake strengthening, a new energy centre and a refurbishment of the George Mason Building. These improvements are key to ensuring the hospital is able to deliver timely and quality healthcare for the people of Nelson. These stages of development of course remain subject to future Budget funding allocations.  

    Conclusion

    Taken together, all of this work represents a significant economic change agenda.  

    I doubt all of this will be welcomed by everyone. 

    It’s easy to say no to a new mine, to say no to concerts at Eden Park, to say no to more tourists, to say no to more housing, to say no to change. But cumulatively all those little “no’s” add up;  they add up to a smaller, poorer country.  

    New Zealanders can’t afford that.  We have to make it easier to get things done in this great country.  We have to deliver on our untapped potential. We owe that to our kids.

    Let me finish on a positive note: New Zealand faces some significant challenges and those challenges have only grown in recent weeks. 

    But if I could choose to be any country at this particular moment in time, I would choose New Zealand. 

    Our Government has a plan, and our plan will mean a stronger, growing economy and that growth will mean New Zealanders can live better lives. And that is what it is all about. Thank you and I look forward to your questions.

    MIL OSI New Zealand News

  • MIL-OSI New Zealand: Tech – Think you’ve won a prize? Cybersecurity experts expose the hidden dangers of fake lottery scams – NordVPN

    Source: NordVPN

    Consumers are being tricked into paying upfront fees for non-existent prizes –cybersecurity experts share how to spot and avoid these growing scams

    More and more people are falling for fake prize scams, where scammers trick them into thinking they’ve won big in a lottery, sweepstakes, or contest they never entered. These fraudsters play on excitement, promising life-changing prizes – only to ask for upfront payments for supposed taxes or fees.

    Once the money is sent, the scammers disappear, leaving victims empty-handed and out of pocket. It’s a growing problem, and experts warn us to stay alert to avoid becoming the next target.

    “The scammers behind these fake prize schemes are sophisticated, often using personal information to make the scams appear more believable. The emotional effect of ‘winning’ a big prize only makes it harder for people to think critically,” says Adrianus Warmenhoven, a cybersecurity expert at NordVPN. (ref. https://nordvpn.com )

    The hidden dangers of prize scams

    While these scams might seem obvious, fraudsters are constantly evolving their tactics. Scam attempts can be extremely convincing, with phony calls, emails, and even fake websites designed to deceive victims into providing their personal information and making payments.

    In 2024, prize scams were the most commonly reported fraud in the US, making up 38.27% of all scam reports, according to the National Consumers League. Also, the Federal Trade Commission reported that in 2023 alone, consumers lost $301 million to lottery and prize scams, with an average loss of $907 per person. These numbers highlight the ongoing impact of prize-related fraud.

    “Scammers use a variety of tactics to make their scam seem real, including spoofing caller IDs, sending counterfeit documents, and creating fake websites that mimic legitimate lottery organizations. They know how to play on human emotions,” explains Warmenhoven.


    Spotting the red flags of fake prize scams


    To protect yourself from falling victim to prize scams, Warmenhoven urges everyone to watch out for these common warning signs:

    1. Unexpected prize notices: If you didn’t enter a contest or lottery, it’s a scam.

    2. Upfront payment requests: Legitimate organizations don’t ask for money upfront to claim a prize.

    3. Pressure tactics: Scammers often create a sense of urgency, threatening that you’ll lose your “winnings” if you don’t act immediately.

    4. Too good to be true: If it sounds too good to be true, it probably is.

    Protecting yourself from prize scams


    Adrianus Warmenhoven emphasizes the importance of staying vigilant and skeptical when receiving unsolicited communication about prize winnings. “Always verify the organization’s legitimacy and never share personal information, such as bank account details or Social Security numbers, over the phone or online unless you’re absolutely sure the source is trustworthy.”


    It is recommended to remember that if you didn’t enter a lottery or sweepstakes, you didn’t win. The best defense against these scams is awareness. If you have any doubts, contact the supposed prize issuer directly through official channels, and never provide personal information unless you’re sure it’s real.


    ABOUT NORDVPN


    NordVPN is the world’s most advanced VPN service provider, chosen by millions of internet users worldwide. The service offers features such as dedicated IP, Double VPN, and Onion Over VPN servers, which help to boost your online privacy with zero tracking. One of NordVPN’s key features is Threat Protection Pro, a tool that blocks malicious websites, trackers, and ads and scans downloads for malware. The latest creation of Nord Security, NordVPN’s parent company, is Saily — a global eSIM service. NordVPN is known for being user friendly and can offer some of the best prices on the market. This VPN provider has over 7,300 servers covering 118 countries worldwide. For more information, visit https://nordvpn.com.

    MIL OSI New Zealand News

  • MIL-OSI USA: Smith Statement on Progress in Trade Talks with India

    Source: United States House of Representatives – Congressman Adrian Smith (R-NE)

    Washington, DC — Today, Ways and Means Trade Subcommittee Chairman Adrian Smith (R-NE) released the following statement after U.S. Vice President J.D. Vance and India Prime Minister Narendra Modi announced Terms of Reference have been finalized for negotiation of a trade agreement.

    “With one of the world’s fastest growing economies and largest populations, improving our trading and strategic partnership with India is vital to the economic and security needs of both our nations. A bilateral trade agreement which will grow cooperation and reduce barriers to trade is important, and I appreciate the work of President Trump, Vice President Vance, and Prime Minister Modi in achieving this step forward. As the Trump administration continues its work, I will continue to insist on science-based standards and expanded markets for American agriculture, energy, digital services, and other products in India and around the world.

    “I would be remiss to not also recognize the tragedy in Kashmir which occurred today. My prayers are with the Indian people as they grieve those lost and as their authorities work to bring the perpetrators to justice.”

    ###

    MIL OSI USA News

  • MIL-OSI USA: Golden praises President Trump’s fishing executive order, urges action on unfair Canadian trade and regulatory practices

    Source: United States House of Representatives – Congressman Jared Golden (ME-02)

    WASHINGTON — Congressman Jared Golden (ME-02) today sent a letter to President Donald Trump highlighting the unfair trade practices and regulatory disparity Canada uses to benefit its lobster industry at the expense of American lobstermen. Golden’s letter follows yesterday’s executive order directing the Secretary of Commerce and U.S. Trade Representative to address regulatory mismanagement informed by scientific uncertainty — a task Golden requested of the administration in a letter just last week and praised last night.

    “Throughout my time in the Maine State Legislature and Congress, I have heard from Maine’s seafood harvesters, processors, and those involved in the ocean economy that they cannot make the necessary investments to grow due to overregulation, arbitrary and capricious management, inconsistent policies from various federal agencies, and unfair trade action from Canada,” Golden wrote in his letter today. “Without your intervention, projections indicate that many commercial fishing operations in New England will become economically unviable within the next 30 years. This would lead to the collapse of a historic food production industry, the loss of thousands of jobs, the devastation of coastal communities that have shaped American maritime heritage for centuries, and an increased reliance on foreign food.”

    Discussing the unequal regulatory burden between the U.S. and Canada, Golden explained that Canadian lobstermen are not required to follow the same conservation measures, like releasing lobsters over a maximum size, that American lobstermen must. He also cited extensive regulations on American fishing gear and environmental practices that are absent in Canada; this burden is especially visible in the Gray Zone — 277 square miles fished by both Mainers and Canadians that remains one of America’s only contested maritime borders.

    Golden equally criticized market manipulation by Canadian seafood processors and expansive subsidies from the Canadian government to undercut the cost of competing American labor. 

    What they’re saying

    “The New England Fishermen’s Stewardship Association (NEFSA) commends Congressman Jared Golden for highlighting the significant disparities faced by American lobstermen compared to their Canadian counterparts in his recent letter to the President. NEFSA has made it a top priority to raise awareness of the longstanding territorial dispute in the Gray Zone and the resulting economic and environmental consequences. Unbalanced regulatory frameworks between the United States and Canada continue to place American fishermen at a disadvantage—both in terms of access to seafood stocks and financial sustainability. We are encouraged by Congressman Golden’s advocacy and remain committed to working collaboratively with him, the White House, and NOAA to address these challenges and secure a fair and equitable future for American fishing communities,” saidDustin Delano, former lobstermen and chief operating officer of the New England Fishermen’s Stewardship Association.

    “The Maine Lobstering Union is thrilled President Trump is looking into imbalances in the US fisheries. Maine fishermen have been supporting Maine’s economy for generations. We continue to raise concerns that Canadian trade practices, unequal conservation, and regulations are hurting Maine families, and it is rewarding to see some of that noise is making its way to President Trump. We commend Representative Golden for working across the aisle. Representative Golden continues to deliver on his promise to put Mainers first. Families in Maine are struggling, and putting our state’s needs above all else is very refreshing,” said Virginia Olsen, lobstermen and director of the Maine Lobstering Union.

    “The Maine Lobstermen’s Association (MLA) is grateful to President Trump for his commitment to making U.S. fisheries great again by allowing us to do what we do best — go fishing! The MLA has been fighting government over-regulation for years and won a historic court case that challenged draconian whale rules taking a big step forward in ending this abuse of power. The President’s executive order recognizes the challenges our fishing families and communities face and we appreciate the commitment to reduce burdensome regulations and strengthen the competitiveness of American seafood. We especially appreciate the Administration’s commitment to protecting the Maine lobster industry which is vital to the economy of our state and our coastal economies,” saidPatrice McCarron, executive director of the Maine Lobstermen’s Association.

    BACKGROUND

    Golden, who recently secured a seat on the House Natural Resources Committee, has fought fiercely on behalf of Maine’s fishing industry throughout his career as a lawmaker. In addition to his letter last week, he has pressed multiple administrations on the unequal regulations and unfair trade practices harming Maine lobstermen.

    Over the last year he has been the only representative from New England to join the effort to overturn a U.S.-only increase to the minimum catchable size of lobster, and helped pass a 6-year pause on new gear regulations in 2022.  His bipartisan Northern Fisheries Heritage Protection Act would also prohibit commercial offshore wind energy development in the critical, highly productive Maine fishing grounds of Lobster Management Area 1 — an issue he has been consistently outspoken on

    Golden’s letter can be found here and is included below in full:

    +++

    April 18, 2025

    The Honorable Donald J. Trump
    President of the United States
    The White House
    1600 Pennsylvania Avenue
    Washington, D.C. 20500

    Dear President Trump,

    In your executive order on “Restoring American Seafood Competitiveness,” you directed the Secretary of Commerce to consider suspending, revising, or rescinding regulations that overly burden America’s commercial fishing industries and the United States Trade Representative to examine other nations’ trade practices. As part of those investigations, I write in support of swift and decisive action to address the unequal regulatory burden between Maine and Canadian lobstermen and the unfair trade practices used by Canada and its lobster industry at the expense of the American lobster industry. 

    Throughout my time in the Maine State Legislature and Congress, I have heard from Maine’s seafood harvesters, processors, and those involved in the ocean economy that they cannot make the necessary investments to grow due to overregulation, arbitrary and capricious management, inconsistent policies from various federal agencies, and unfair trade action from Canada. Action to address the unequal regulatory burden between American and Canadian lobstermen and end Canada’s unfair trade practices in the lobster industry is squarely in line with your fisheries executive order and your administration’s “America First Trade Policy.” Any ensuing changes should be made in consultation with those who know the industry best, the harvesters themselves. 

    The American lobster fishery extends from Maine to Cape Hatteras, North Carolina. In 2022, commercial landings of American lobster totaled 119 million pounds, valued at $515 million, according to the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA) Fisheries. Maine has been at the forefront of American lobster landings for over three decades, and 93 percent of the coast-wide landings come from the Gulf of Maine lobster stock. 

    While I have written to your administration and previous administrations extensively about each issue, I want to highlight the following issues: 

    Unequal Regulatory Burden Between the U.S. and Canada:  

    Regulations are frustratingly inconsistent between the U.S. and Canada, significantly benefiting Canadian fishermen and actively harming U.S. fishermen. While the long-term viability of lobster stocks is essential for the economic success of American and Canadian harvesters, it is American fishermen and lobstermen who are required to adhere to the strictest conservation standards, whereas Canadian fishermen are not. Below is a list of the top issues causing an uneven regulatory playing field:  

    Maximum Size Limit: American lobstermen are required to follow a maximum size limit for harvesting lobster, and Canadian lobstermen do not.

    Whale Regulations: Since 2001, U.S. lobstermen have been required to comply with whale regulations, including new requirements for gear marking, breakaways, weak ropes, and inserts, as well as changes to trawl length due to the NOAA Atlantic Large Whale Take Reduction Plan. This plan was developed and implemented in response to the Marine Mammal Protection Act despite limited evidence linking Maine fishermen to whale deaths.

    These requirements increased costs and safety risks for U.S. fishermen. Canadian lobstermen do not face these same restrictions. For instance, U.S. fishermen must use whale-safe gear, which incurs additional costs, to protect whales that frequently transit through Canadian and American waters. Meanwhile, Canadian fishermen continue to fish with floating rope, which costs nearly 50% less than traditional methods. 

    If pending federal rules regulating even more restrictive gear requirements are implemented, American fishermen will face an even more significant competitive disadvantage. They would be forced to use untested, less efficient, more expensive equipment, while Canada’s gear would be untouched. 

    Gray Zone: The 277 square miles of ocean between the U.S. and Canada – commonly referred to as the Gray Zone – have been claimed by both countries since the Revolutionary War. For centuries, the lobstermen and fishermen of Downeast Maine have relied on the Gray Zone to harvest lobster, scallop, and halibut, often competing with their Canadian counterparts who utilize these same fishing grounds. 

    The disparity between the United States and Canadian fishing regulations in the Gray Zone not only escalates tensions among fishermen but also poses a serious threat to the future of an industry that has supported Maine families for generations. These concerning trends would only worsen if our federal regulators approved a new minimum allowable catch size for lobster starting in July 2025, without comparable restrictions for Canadian lobstermen enforced by their government. 

    Maine’s seafood harvesters have been waiting too long for a resolution to the Gray Zone, with significant consequences for their safety, businesses, and the natural resources they depend on. 

    A 2023 Department of State Report written for Congress titled “Progress Toward an Agreement with Canadian Officials Addressing Territorial Disputes and Collecting Fisheries Management Measures in the Gulf of Maine” incorrectly states:

    “The status quo benefits the United States by keeping the Gray Zone aligned with the more favorable measures applicable to the broader U.S. lobster management area within which it sits. Current cooperation has proved effective in managing the area. Negotiations to resolve the dispute would require significant dedicated resources. In the absence of a resolution of the territorial dispute, an agreement to resolve differing fisheries management measures in the Gray Zone could impact U.S. claims to sovereignty by creating regulations that differ from those applicable to the broader Gulf of Maine jurisdiction in which the Gray Zone lies.”

    The truth is that, as management currently exists, there is no cooperation in managing this area. This report is misleading, and American fishermen fishing in the Gray Zone will tell you that the uneven regulatory burden in the area does not benefit American fishermen; it hurts them. 

    Environmental Regulations: Canada has considerably fewer environmental regulations compared to U.S. processors. For example, Canadian processors can directly discharge wastewater into the ocean and spread shells in fields. In the U.S., processors must pay thousands of dollars to local municipalities for wastewater user fees and waste disposal.

    Unfair Trade Practices Utilized by the Canadian Lobster Industry at the Expense of the American Lobster Industry: 

    Canadian Subsidies:The Canadian Government uses labor and business subsidies to boost their lobster industry at the expense of the American lobster industry.    

    Since 1984, the Canada Health Act (CHA) gives all Canadians publicly funded single-payer healthcare insurance. This program gives all Canadian residents reasonable access to medically necessary hospital and physician services without paying out-of-pocket. To highlight the disparity, U.S. fishermen who buy a health insurance plan on HealthCare.gov would pay, on average, $456 per month more for insurance premiums, which is $5,472 per year more than Canadian fishermen.

    Canadian single-payer healthcare insurance also creates an impact on unemployment premiums. Under the Canadian system, workers’ compensation largely drives costs through lost earnings and wage-loss benefits. This causes U.S. fishermen to pay higher unemployment premiums. This distinction comes from their healthcare system, which incurs fewer administrative expenses and lower healthcare costs that affect an employer’s experience rating. 

    The Canadian lobster industry also has access to unlimited foreign labor and, as a result, low-wage workers. They provide salary subsidies covering up to 60% of the salary for immigrants or visible minority hires, up to a maximum equivalent to the current minimum wage of 40 hours per week. The Canadian government also makes major investments in training programs for the workforce and worker subsidy initiatives. For instance, their Summer Jobs wage subsidy offers financial support for summer employment and visas for foreign workers through the Temporary Foreign Workers Program (TFWP) allows Canadian processors to bring unlimited overseas workers during peak seasons to fill labor shortages.

    Canada also utilizes infrastructure, innovation, and business operation subsidies to boost their lobster industry at the expense of the American industry. Through the Atlantic Fisheries Fund (AFF) and Quebec Fisheries Fund (QFF), Canadian fisheries receive substantial subsidies to support their infrastructure, innovation, and businessoperations. The AFF and QFF are financed 70% by the federal government and 30% by the provincial governments. They are managed by the Canada Department of Fisheries and Oceans (DFO), which aims to enhance opportunities and market value for sustainably sourced, high-quality fish and seafood products from Atlantic Canada. A recent announcement from the Canadian DFO indicated that it will invest over $400 million over seven years to support Canada’s fish and seafood sector. In the US, industry-based and driven science partnerships are limited and frequently funded by the industry.

    Market manipulation: Canadian processors are engaging in currency arbitrage and exploiting market conditions. For instance, in the U.S., we pay roughly $20 per hour at our processing plants. Canada pays the same $20 per hour. Canadian processors factor the hourly wage into the production of processed lobster. They produce the product in Canada and then sell it back to the U.S. The exchange rate does not favor U.S. processors because of the strength of the U.S. dollar, which makes imports to the U.S. cheaper and exports more expensive.

    Without your intervention, projections indicate that many commercial fishing operations in New England will become economically unviable within the next 30 years. This would lead to the collapse of a historic food production industry, the loss of thousands of jobs, the devastation of coastal communities that have shaped American maritime heritage for centuries, and an increased reliance on foreign food. Addressing the unequal regulatory burden and unfair Canadian fishing and trade practices aligns strongly with your executive order on restoring America’s seafood competitiveness and America First Trade Policy and would ensure that American workers and businesses can compete on a level playing field.

    The United States should take all necessary steps to ensure that our fishermen and processors do not face a competitive disadvantage or miss out on economic opportunities because of unequal regulatory burden and unfair fishing and trade practices by Canada. I urge you to investigate Canada’s unfair trade and fishing practices and work with the American lobster industry to intervene with solutions to level the playing field.

     

    ###

    MIL OSI USA News

  • MIL-OSI USA: April 22nd, 2025 Heinrich, Daines, Neguse, Leger Fernández Introduce Bipartisan Legislation to Complete the Continental Divide National Scenic Trail

    US Senate News:

    Source: United States Senator for New Mexico Martin Heinrich

    WASHINGTON – U.S. Senator Martin Heinrich (D-N.M.), Ranking Member of the Senate Energy and Natural Resources Committee, U.S. Senator Steve Daines (R-Mont.), and U.S. Representatives Joe Neguse (D-Colo.) and Teresa Leger Fernández (D-N.M.) introduced their bipartisan Continental Divide National Scenic Trail Completion Act, legislation that directs the Secretaries of the U.S. Department of Agriculture (USDA) and U.S. Department of Interior to prioritize the completion of the Continental Divide National Scenic Trail (CDT).

    Designated by Congress as part of the National Trail System in 1978, the Continental Divide National Scenic Trail stretches more than 3,000 miles and passes through New Mexico, Colorado, Wyoming, Montana, and Idaho. The trail follows the Continental Divide and transverses some of the nation’s most treasured natural, historic, and cultural resources.

    Since the Continental Divide National Scenic Trail’s creation, stakeholders have worked tirelessly to complete the trail. Today, more than 160 miles of the trail require diversions onto roadways and highways, and 600 miles of the trail require relocation.Closing these gaps and relocating these segments will help better maintain the trail’s purpose while ensuring a safer and more enjoyable journey for hikers.

    “The existing Continental Divide National Scenic Trail serves as a major economic driver for communities along the trail like Grants and Silver City, New Mexico. The trail also provides recreational access to some of our most incredible natural, historic, and cultural landscapes,” said Heinrich, Ranking Member of the Senate Energy and Natural Resources Committee. “Our Continental Divide National Scenic Trail Completion Act will finally finish incomplete portions of the trail and make it easier and safer for locals and through-hikers to access. As a National Scenic Trail, the Continental Divide Trail deserves no less.”

    “The Continental Divide Trail provides an unmatched outdoor experience for Montanans and visitors alike,” said Daines. “My bipartisan bill ensures the trail will continue to provide public access and a continuous route will finally be completed.”

    “It’s been nearly half a century since Congress formally established the Continental Divide Trail, a scenic route that spans the Rocky Mountains and crosses five states. Since then, the trail has provided the American people with world-class recreational opportunities and has served as an economic driver for the rural towns and cities along its route. In championing the Continental Divide National Scenic Trail Completion Act, we are calling on the federal government to fulfill its promise to complete the trail’s full 3,100-mile length, enhancing the benefits this iconic trail brings to both our people and our public lands,” said Neguse, Ranking Member of the House Subcommittee on Federal Lands.

    “A divided and incomplete Continental Divide Trail is calling out for congressional action to finish the job. A completed trail highlights and honors the unique cultures and environments along its route in New Mexico.” said Rep. Leger Fernández. “This bill will help grow our outdoor recreation economy and support the rural communities along the CDT. Importantly, it also makes sure we respect local landowners, Tribes, Land Grants-Mercedes, Acequias, and other land users. I look forward to co-leading the bill again this Congress with Congressman Neguse and my colleagues.”

    Specifically, the Continental Divide National Scenic Trail Completion Act: 

    • Directs the USDA Secretary and Interior Secretary to establish a Trail Completion Team comprised of the U.S. Forest Service (USFS), the Bureau of Land Management (BLM) and the Continental Divide National Scenic Trail Administrator. This team will be responsible for conducting optimal location reviews and to assist in developing a comprehensive development plan for the Trail.
    • Recognizes the value of cooperation between federal land managers, states, Tribes, towns, Native communities, and others. The Continental Divide Trail Completion Act directs USFS and BLM to maintain close partnerships with stakeholders in developing, maintaining, and managing the trail.
    • Requires the completion of a comprehensive development plan for the Trail, to include areas of Trail where there are gaps, opportunities for acquiring land to complete the trail, and site-specific Trail development plans.
    • Ensures that land purchased to complete the trail may only be acquired from willing sellers.

    Last year, the Continental Divide National Scenic Trail Completion Act passed through the Senate Energy and Natural Resources Committee with unanimous consent. The legislation has the backing of the Continental Divide Trail Coalition and a number of organizations and businesses.

    “Completing the CDT is not just about closing the gaps — it’s about all the benefits that result from ensuring connections to one of the country’s most important landscapes exist for future generations,” said Teresa Martinez, Executive Director of the Continental Divide Trail Coalition.

    Text of the Continental Divide National Scenic Trail Completion Act can be found here.

    Timeline of Actions on Continental Divide National Scenic Trail in 118th Congress:

    MIL OSI USA News

  • MIL-OSI: Baker Hughes Company Announces First-Quarter 2025 Results

    Source: GlobeNewswire (MIL-OSI)

    First-quarter highlights

    • Orders of $6.5 billion, including $3.2 billion of IET orders.
    • RPO of $33.2 billion, including record IET RPO of $30.4 billion.
    • Revenue of $6.4 billion, consistent year-over-year.
    • Attributable net income of $402 million.
    • GAAP diluted EPS of $0.40 and adjusted diluted EPS* of $0.51.
    • Adjusted EBITDA* of $1,037 million, up 10% year-over-year.
    • Cash flows from operating activities of $709 million and free cash flow* of $454 million.
    • Returns to shareholders of $417 million, including $188 million of share repurchases.

    HOUSTON and LONDON, April 22, 2025 (GLOBE NEWSWIRE) — Baker Hughes Company (Nasdaq: BKR) (“Baker Hughes” or the “Company”) announced results today for the first quarter of 2025.

    “Baker Hughes started the year strong, building on the positive momentum from 2024 and setting multiple first-quarter records. Our continued transformation initiatives and strong execution continue to drive structural margin improvement across both segments. The operational transformation and streamlining efforts have created a solid foundation to optimize margins and enhance returns, even in a challenging environment,” said Lorenzo Simonelli, Baker Hughes chairman and chief executive officer.

    “In our IET segment, we booked $3.2 billion of orders, including our first data center awards, totaling more than 350 MW of power solutions for this rapidly evolving market. In addition to expanding opportunities for data centers, we have a strong pipeline of LNG, FPSO and gas infrastructure projects that support our order outlook for this year.”

    “In OFSE, EBITDA remained resilient as our margins saw noticeable improvement compared to last year even while segment revenue fell. This is a testament to the team’s hard work in changing the way the business operates.”

    “Although our outlook is tempered by broader macro and trade policy uncertainty, we remain confident in our strategy and the resilience of our portfolio. We believe Baker Hughes is well positioned to navigate near-term challenges and deliver sustainable growth in shareholder value.”

    “I want to thank our employees, whose hard work, dedication and focus have been instrumental to the continued success of Baker Hughes. As we continue to execute our strategy amidst an uncertain macro backdrop, we remain committed to our customers, shareholders and employees,” concluded Simonelli.

    * Non-GAAP measure. See reconciliations in the section titled “Reconciliation of GAAP to non-GAAP Financial Measures.”

      Three Months Ended   Variance
    (in millions except per share amounts) March 31,
    2025
    December 31,
    2024
    March 31,
    2024
      Sequential Year-over-
    year
    Orders $ 6,459 $ 7,496 $ 6,542   (14 %) (1 %)
    Revenue   6,427   7,364   6,418   (13 %) %
    Net income attributable to Baker Hughes   402   1,179   455   (66 %) (12 %)
    Adjusted net income attributable to Baker Hughes*   509   694   429   (27 %) 19 %
    Adjusted EBITDA*   1,037   1,310   943   (21 %) 10 %
    Diluted earnings per share (EPS)   0.40   1.18   0.45   (66 %) (11 %)
    Adjusted diluted EPS*   0.51   0.70   0.43   (27 %) 19 %
    Cash flow from operating activities   709   1,189   784   (40 %) (10 %)
    Free cash flow*   454   894   502   (49 %) (10 %)

    * Non-GAAP measure. See reconciliations in the section titled “Reconciliation of GAAP to non-GAAP Financial Measures.”

    Certain columns and rows in our tables and financial statements may not sum up due to the use of rounded numbers.

    Quarter Highlights

    Baker Hughes expanded its leadership position in liquefied natural gas (“LNG”) in the first quarter, including a liquefaction train award from Bechtel for a project in North America, where the Company will provide four main refrigerant compressors driven by LM6000+ gas turbines and four expander-compressors. This award builds on the previously announced December 2024 award and further demonstrates the strength of the Company’s collaboration with Bechtel to support North America LNG development.

    During the quarter, Industrial & Energy Technology (“IET”) signed key strategic framework agreements with LNG operators. The Company agreed to provide gas turbines and refrigerant compressor technology, along with maintenance services, for Trains 4 to 8 of NextDecade’s Rio Grande LNG Facility. Baker Hughes also reached an agreement with Argent LNG to provide liquefaction and power solutions and related aftermarket services for its proposed 24 MTPA LNG export facility in Louisiana. The project will employ Baker Hughes’ NMBL™ modularized LNG solution, driven by the LM9000 gas turbine, while also utilizing the Company’s iCenter™ and Cordant™ digital solution, to enhance the plant’s operational efficiency.

    Baker Hughes also demonstrated its continuous commitment to critical gas infrastructure projects with a strategic win in the North America pipeline compression market. The award includes the provision of two gas compression stations for a total of 10 Frame 5/2E gas turbines and 10 centrifugal compressors, anti-surge valves and critical spare parts.

    In the first quarter, Baker Hughes made significant progress in reliable and sustainable power solutions deployment for data centers. In addition to being awarded over 350 MW of NovaLT™ turbines to power data centers with various other customers, the Company partnered with Frontier Infrastructure to accelerate the development of large-scale carbon capture and storage (“CCS”) and power solutions for data centers and industrial customers in the U.S. This partnership will leverage technologies and services across the Baker Hughes enterprise by providing CO₂ compression, NovaLT™ gas turbines, digital monitoring solutions, well construction and completion services.

    In continued demonstration of Gas Technology’s lifecycle offerings in IET, the Company received several aftermarket service awards during the quarter. In Algeria, the Gas Technology Services (“GTS”) team is partnering with SONATRACH to deliver an upgrade solution for the modernization of a key compressor station. In the Middle East, Gas Technology received multiple equipment and services awards to support one of the world’s largest gas processing plants. The scope includes rejuvenation of two existing gas turbines to drive new compressors and the supply of a third compression train to support production expansion.

    IET’s Industrial Solutions gained momentum with its Cordant™ Asset Performance Management (“APM”) solution, securing several contracts with customers across multiple regions. ADNOC Offshore will deploy the full APM suite to enhance production availability and efficiency. In the Americas, a large international oil company will conduct a proof of concept across multiple equipment trains, to support a shift from proactive to predictive maintenance. In Australia, the Company signed agreements to develop asset maintenance strategies for new mine sites supporting truck fleet maintenance.

    Oilfield Services & Equipment (“OFSE”) received a significant award from ExxonMobil Guyana to provide specialty chemicals and related services for its Uaru and Whiptail offshore greenfield developments in the country’s prolific Stabroek Block, highlighting the differentiated capabilities of our Production Solutions offering. For this multi-year contract, the scope will cover topsides, subsea, water injection and utility chemicals to help ExxonMobil Guyana achieve optimal production.

    OFSE continues to leverage the Company’s innovative solutions to help Petrobras unlock Brazil’s vast energy supply. In the quarter and following an open tender, Baker Hughes received a significant, multi-year fully integrated completions systems contract from Petrobras across multiple deepwater fields. A range of Baker Hughes’ technologies, including the new SureCONTROLTM Premium interval control valve, has been specifically tailored to meet the needs of the country’s offshore developments.

    OFSE secured a multi-year contract with Dubai Petroleum Establishment, for and on behalf of Dubai Supply Authority, to provide integrated coiled-tubing drilling services for the Company’s Margham Gas storage project. This follows a third-quarter 2024 IET award for integrated compressor line units for the same project, demonstrating growing commercial synergies across Baker Hughes’ diverse portfolio.

    The Company drove growth in Mature Assets Solutions, signing a multi-year framework agreement with Equinor to help establish a new Center of Excellence for Plug & Abandonment work in the North Sea. Based within OFSE’s operations in Bergen and Stavanger, Norway, this hub will ensure economical, reliable solutions are implemented to responsibly abandon each well, allowing Equinor to maximize value of their assets and allocate more resources to exploration and discovery.

    On the digital front, OFSE received an award from the State Oil Company of Azerbaijan Republic (“SOCAR”) to expand deployment of Leucipa™ automated field production solution for all its wells, including those with non-Baker Hughes electric submersible pumps, in the Absheron and Gunseli fields. Leucipa also marked its first deployment in Sub-Saharan Africa through an agreement with the NNPC/FIRST E&P joint venture, which will utilize the platform across its offshore wells in the Niger Delta.

    Consolidated Financial Results

    Revenue for the quarter was $6,427 million, a decrease of 13% sequentially and up $9 million year-over-year. The increase in revenue year-over-year was driven by an increase in IET and partially offset by a decrease in OFSE.

    The Company’s total book-to-bill ratio in the first quarter of 2025 was 1.0; the IET book-to-bill ratio was 1.1.

    Net income as determined in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America (“GAAP”), for the first quarter of 2025 was $402 million. Net income decreased $777 million sequentially and decreased $53 million year-over-year.

    Adjusted net income (a non-GAAP financial measure) for the first quarter of 2025 was $509 million, which excludes adjustments totaling $108 million. A list of the adjusting items and associated reconciliation from GAAP has been provided in Table 1b in the section titled “Reconciliation of GAAP to non-GAAP Financial Measures.” Adjusted net income for the first quarter of 2025 was down 27% sequentially and up 19% year-over-year.

    Depreciation and amortization for the first quarter of 2025 was $285 million.

    Adjusted EBITDA (a non-GAAP financial measure) for the first quarter of 2025 was $1,037 million, which excludes adjustments totaling $140 million. See Table 1a in the section titled “Reconciliation of GAAP to non-GAAP Financial Measures.” Adjusted EBITDA for the first quarter was down 21% sequentially and up 10% year-over-year.

    The sequential decrease in adjusted net income and adjusted EBITDA was primarily driven by lower volume in both segments, partially offset by productivity and structural cost-out initiatives. The year-over-year increase in adjusted net income and adjusted EBITDA was driven by increased volume in IET including higher proportionate growth in Gas Technology Equipment (“GTE”) and productivity, structural cost-out initiatives and higher pricing in both segments, partially offset by decreased volume and business mix in OFSE and cost inflation in both segments.

    Other Financial Items

    Remaining Performance Obligations (“RPO”) in the first quarter of 2025 ended at $33.2 billion, a decrease of $0.1 billion from the fourth quarter of 2024. OFSE RPO was $2.8 billion, down 7% sequentially, while IET RPO was $30.4 billion, up $300 million sequentially. Within IET RPO, GTE RPO was $11.9 billion and GTS RPO was $15.1 billion.

    Income tax expense in the first quarter of 2025 was $152 million.

    Other (income) expense, net in the first quarter of 2025 was $140 million, primarily related to changes in fair value for equity securities of $140 million.

    GAAP diluted earnings per share was $0.40. Adjusted diluted earnings per share (a non-GAAP financial measure) was $0.51. Excluded from adjusted diluted earnings per share were all items listed in Table 1b in the section titled “Reconciliation of GAAP to non-GAAP Financial Measures.”

    Cash flow from operating activities was $709 million for the first quarter of 2025. Free cash flow (a non-GAAP financial measure) for the quarter was $454 million. A reconciliation from GAAP has been provided in Table 1c in the section titled “Reconciliation of GAAP to non-GAAP Financial Measures.”

    Capital expenditures, net of proceeds from disposal of assets, were $255 million for the first quarter of 2025, of which $158 million was for OFSE and $83 million was for IET.

    Results by Reporting Segment

    The following segment discussions and variance explanations are intended to reflect management’s view of the relevant comparisons of financial results on a sequential or year-over-year basis, depending on the business dynamics of the reporting segments.

    Oilfield Services & Equipment

    (in millions) Three Months Ended   Variance
    Segment results March 31,
    2025
    December 31,
    2024
    March 31,
    2024
      Sequential Year-over-
    year
    Orders $ 3,281   $ 3,740   $ 3,624     (12 %) (9 %)
    Revenue $ 3,499   $ 3,871   $ 3,783     (10 %) (8 %)
    EBITDA $ 623   $ 755   $ 644     (18 %) (3 %)
    EBITDA margin   17.8 %   19.5 %   17.0 %   -1.7pts 0.8pts
    (in millions) Three Months Ended   Variance
    Revenue by Product Line March 31,
    2025
    December 31,
    2024
    March 31,
    2024
      Sequential Year-over-
    year
    Well Construction $ 892 $ 943 $ 1,061   (5 %) (16 %)
    Completions, Intervention, and Measurements   925   1,022   1,006   (9 %) (8 %)
    Production Solutions   899   974   945   (8 %) (5 %)
    Subsea & Surface Pressure Systems   782   932   771   (16 %) 1 %
    Total Revenue $ 3,499 $ 3,871 $ 3,783   (10 %) (8 %)
    (in millions) Three Months Ended   Variance
    Revenue by Geographic Region March 31,
    2025
    December 31,
    2024
    March 31,
    2024
      Sequential Year-over-
    year
    North America $ 922 $ 971 $ 990   (5 %) (7 %)
    Latin America   568   661   637   (14 %) (11 %)
    Europe/CIS/Sub-Saharan Africa   580   740   750   (22 %) (23 %)
    Middle East/Asia   1,429   1,499   1,405   (5 %) 2 %
    Total Revenue $ 3,499 $ 3,871 $ 3,783   (10 %) (8 %)
                 
    North America $ 922 $ 971 $ 990   (5 %) (7 %)
    International $ 2,577 $ 2,900 $ 2,793   (11 %) (8 %)

    EBITDA excludes depreciation and amortization of $226 million, $229 million, and $222 million for the three months ended March 31, 2025, December 31, 2024, and March 31, 2024, respectively. EBITDA margin is defined as EBITDA divided by revenue.

    OFSE orders of $3,281 million for the first quarter of 2025 decreased by 12% sequentially. Subsea and Surface Pressure Systems orders were $532 million, down 34% sequentially, and down 16% year-over-year.

    OFSE revenue of $3,499 million for the first quarter of 2025 was down 10% sequentially, and down 8% year-over-year.

    North America revenue was $922 million, down 5% sequentially. International revenue was $2,577 million, down 11% sequentially, with declines across all regions.

    Segment EBITDA for the first quarter of 2025 was $623 million, a decrease of $132 million, or 18% sequentially. The sequential decrease in EBITDA was primarily driven by lower volume, partially mitigated by productivity from structural cost-out initiatives.

    Industrial & Energy Technology

    (in millions) Three Months Ended   Variance
    Segment results March 31,
    2025
    December 31,
    2024
    March 31,
    2024
      Sequential Year-over-
    year
    Orders $ 3,178   $ 3,756   $ 2,918     (15 %) 9 %
    Revenue $ 2,928   $ 3,492   $ 2,634     (16 %) 11 %
    EBITDA $ 501   $ 639   $ 386     (22 %) 30 %
    EBITDA margin   17.1 %   18.3 %   14.7 %   -1.2pts 2.4pts
    (in millions) Three Months Ended   Variance
    Orders by Product Line March 31,
    2025
    December 31,
    2024
    March 31,
    2024
      Sequential Year-over-
    year
    Gas Technology Equipment $ 1,335 $ 1,865 $ 1,230   (28 %) 9 %
    Gas Technology Services   913   902   692   1 % 32 %
    Total Gas Technology   2,248   2,767   1,922   (19 %) 17 %
    Industrial Products   501   515   546   (3 %) (8 %)
    Industrial Solutions   281   320   257   (12 %) 10 %
    Total Industrial Technology   782   835   803   (6 %) (3 %)
    Climate Technology Solutions   148   154   193   (4 %) (23 %)
    Total Orders $ 3,178 $ 3,756 $ 2,918   (15 %) 9 %
    (in millions) Three Months Ended   Variance
    Revenue by Product Line March 31,
    2025
    December 31,
    2024
    March 31,
    2024
      Sequential Year-over-
    year
    Gas Technology Equipment $ 1,456 $ 1,663 $ 1,210   (12 %) 20 %
    Gas Technology Services   592   796   614   (26 %) (4 %)
    Total Gas Technology   2,047   2,459   1,824   (17 %) 12 %
    Industrial Products   445   548   462   (19 %) (4 %)
    Industrial Solutions   258   282   265   (8 %) (2 %)
    Total Industrial Technology   703   830   727   (15 %) (3 %)
    Climate Technology Solutions   178   204   83   (13 %) 114 %
    Total Revenue $ 2,928 $ 3,492 $ 2,634   (16 %) 11 %

    EBITDA excludes depreciation and amortization of $53 million, $56 million, and $56 million for the three months ended March 31, 2025, December 31, 2024, and March 31, 2024, respectively. EBITDA margin is defined as EBITDA divided by revenue.

    IET orders of $3,178 million for the first quarter of 2025 increased by $260 million, or 9% year-over-year. The increase was driven primarily by Gas Technology, up $326 million or 17% year-over-year.

    IET revenue of $2,928 million for the first quarter of 2025 increased $294 million, or 11% year-over-year. The increase was driven by Gas Technology Equipment, up $246 million or 20% year-over-year, and Climate Technology Solutions, up $95 million or 114% year-over-year.

    Segment EBITDA for the quarter was $501 million, an increase of $114 million, or 30% year-over-year. The year-over-year increase in segment EBITDA was driven by productivity, positive pricing and increased volume including higher proportionate growth in GTE, partially offset by cost inflation.

    Reconciliation of GAAP to non-GAAP Financial Measures

    Management provides non-GAAP financial measures because it believes such measures are widely accepted financial indicators used by investors and analysts to analyze and compare companies on the basis of operating performance (including adjusted EBITDA; adjusted net income attributable to Baker Hughes; and adjusted diluted earnings per share) and liquidity (free cash flow) and that these measures may be used by investors to make informed investment decisions. Management believes that the exclusion of certain identified items from several key operating performance measures enables us to evaluate our operations more effectively, to identify underlying trends in the business, and to establish operational goals for certain management compensation purposes. Management also believes that free cash flow is an important supplemental measure of our cash performance but should not be considered as a measure of residual cash flow available for discretionary purposes, or as an alternative to cash flow from operating activities presented in accordance with GAAP.

    Table 1a. Reconciliation of Net Income Attributable to Baker Hughes to Adjusted EBITDA and Segment EBITDA

      Three Months Ended
    (in millions) March 31,
    2025
    December 31,
    2024
    March 31,
    2024
    Net income attributable to Baker Hughes (GAAP) $ 402 $ 1,179   $ 455  
    Net income attributable to noncontrolling interests   7   11     8  
    Provision (benefit) for income taxes   152   (398 )   178  
    Interest expense, net   51   54     41  
    Depreciation & amortization   285   291     283  
    Restructuring     258      
    Inventory impairment(1)     73      
    Change in fair value of equity securities(2)   140   (196 )   (52 )
    Other charges and credits(2)     38     30  
    Adjusted EBITDA (non-GAAP)   1,037   1,310     943  
    Corporate costs   85   84     88  
    Other income / (expense) not allocated to segments   1        
    Total Segment EBITDA (non-GAAP) $ 1,124 $ 1,394   $ 1,030  
    OFSE   623   755     644  
    IET   501   639     386  

    (1) Charges for inventory impairments are reported in “Cost of goods sold” in the condensed consolidated statements of income (loss).

    (2) Change in fair value of equity securities and other charges and credits are reported in “Other (income) expense, net” on the condensed consolidated statements of income (loss).

    Table 1a reconciles net income attributable to Baker Hughes, which is the directly comparable financial result determined in accordance with GAAP, to adjusted EBITDA and Segment EBITDA. Adjusted EBITDA and Segment EBITDA exclude the impact of certain identified items.

    Table 1b. Reconciliation of Net Income Attributable to Baker Hughes to Adjusted Net Income Attributable to Baker Hughes

      Three Months Ended
    (in millions, except per share amounts) March 31,
    2025
    December 31,
    2024
    March 31,
    2024
    Net income attributable to Baker Hughes (GAAP) $ 402   $ 1,179   $ 455  
    Restructuring       258      
    Inventory impairment       73      
    Change in fair value of equity securities   140     (196 )   (52 )
    Other adjustments       30     32  
    Tax adjustments(1)   (32 )   (650 )   (6 )
    Total adjustments, net of income tax   108     (485 )   (26 )
    Less: adjustments attributable to noncontrolling interests            
    Adjustments attributable to Baker Hughes   108     (485 )   (26 )
    Adjusted net income attributable to Baker Hughes (non-GAAP) $ 509   $ 694   $ 429  
           
    Denominator:      
    Weighted-average shares of Class A common stock outstanding diluted   999     999     1,004  
    Adjusted earnings per share – diluted (non-GAAP) $ 0.51   $ 0.70   $ 0.43  

    (1) All periods reflect the tax associated with the other (income) loss adjustments.

    Table 1b reconciles net income attributable to Baker Hughes, which is the directly comparable financial result determined in accordance with GAAP, to adjusted net income attributable to Baker Hughes. Adjusted net income attributable to Baker Hughes excludes the impact of certain identified items.

    Table 1c. Reconciliation of Net Cash Flows From Operating Activities to Free Cash Flow

      Three Months Ended
    (in millions) March 31,
    2025
    December 31,
    2024
    March 31,
    2024
    Net cash flows from operating activities (GAAP) $ 709   $ 1,189   $ 784  
    Add: cash used for capital expenditures, net of proceeds from disposal of assets   (255 )   (295 )   (282 )
    Free cash flow (non-GAAP) $ 454   $ 894   $ 502  

    Table 1c reconciles net cash flows from operating activities, which is the directly comparable financial result determined in accordance with GAAP, to free cash flow. Free cash flow is defined as net cash flows from operating activities less expenditures for capital assets plus proceeds from disposal of assets.

     
    Financial Tables (GAAP)
     
    Condensed Consolidated Statements of Income (Loss)
     
    (Unaudited)
     
      Three Months Ended March 31,
    (In millions, except per share amounts)   2025     2024  
    Revenue $ 6,427   $ 6,418  
    Costs and expenses:    
    Cost of revenue   4,952     4,976  
    Selling, general and administrative   577     618  
    Research and development costs   146     164  
    Other (income) expense, net   140     (22 )
    Interest expense, net   51     41  
    Income before income taxes   561     641  
    Provision for income taxes   (152 )   (178 )
    Net income   409     463  
    Less: Net income attributable to noncontrolling interests   7     8  
    Net income attributable to Baker Hughes Company $ 402   $ 455  
         
    Per share amounts:  
    Basic income per Class A common stock $ 0.41   $ 0.46  
    Diluted income per Class A common stock $ 0.40   $ 0.45  
         
    Weighted average shares:    
    Class A basic   992     998  
    Class A diluted   999     1,004  
         
    Cash dividend per Class A common stock $ 0.23   $ 0.21  
         
    Condensed Consolidated Statements of Financial Position
     
    (Unaudited)
     
    (In millions) March 31, 2025 December 31, 2024
    ASSETS
    Current Assets:    
    Cash and cash equivalents $ 3,277 $ 3,364
    Current receivables, net   6,710   7,122
    Inventories, net   5,161   4,954
    All other current assets   1,693   1,771
    Total current assets   16,841   17,211
    Property, plant and equipment, less accumulated depreciation   5,168   5,127
    Goodwill   6,126   6,078
    Other intangible assets, net   3,927   3,951
    Contract and other deferred assets   1,680   1,730
    All other assets   4,368   4,266
    Total assets $ 38,110 $ 38,363
    LIABILITIES AND EQUITY
    Current Liabilities:    
    Accounts payable $ 4,465 $ 4,542
    Short-term debt   55   53
    Progress collections and deferred income   5,589   5,672
    All other current liabilities   2,485   2,724
    Total current liabilities   12,594   12,991
    Long-term debt   5,969   5,970
    Liabilities for pensions and other postretirement benefits   985   988
    All other liabilities   1,356   1,359
    Equity   17,206   17,055
    Total liabilities and equity $ 38,110 $ 38,363
         
    Outstanding Baker Hughes Company shares:    
    Class A common stock   990   990
    Condensed Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows
     
    (Unaudited)
      Three Months Ended March 31,
    (In millions)   2025     2024  
    Cash flows from operating activities:    
    Net income $ 409   $ 463  
    Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash flows from operating activities:    
    Depreciation and amortization   285     283  
    Stock-based compensation cost   50     51  
    Change in fair value of equity securities   140     (52 )
    Benefit for deferred income taxes   (53 )   (24 )
    Working capital   218     209  
    Other operating items, net   (340 )   (146 )
    Net cash flows provided by operating activities   709     784  
    Cash flows from investing activities:    
    Expenditures for capital assets   (300 )   (333 )
    Proceeds from disposal of assets   45     51  
    Other investing items, net   (55 )   13  
    Net cash flows used in investing activities   (310 )   (269 )
    Cash flows from financing activities:    
    Dividends paid   (229 )   (210 )
    Repurchase of Class A common stock   (188 )   (158 )
    Other financing items, net   (85 )   (59 )
    Net cash flows used in financing activities   (502 )   (427 )
    Effect of currency exchange rate changes on cash and cash equivalents   16     (17 )
    Increase (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents   (87 )   71  
    Cash and cash equivalents, beginning of period   3,364     2,646  
    Cash and cash equivalents, end of period $ 3,277   $ 2,717  
    Supplemental cash flows disclosures:    
    Income taxes paid, net of refunds $ 207   $ 108  
    Interest paid $ 50   $ 48  

    Supplemental Financial Information

    Supplemental financial information can be found on the Company’s website at: investors.bakerhughes.com in the Financial Information section under Quarterly Results.

    Conference Call and Webcast

    The Company has scheduled an investor conference call to discuss management’s outlook and the results reported in today’s earnings announcement. The call will begin at 9:30 a.m. Eastern time, 8:30 a.m. Central time on Wednesday, April 23, 2025, the content of which is not part of this earnings release. The conference call will be broadcast live via a webcast and can be accessed by visiting the Events and Presentations page on the Company’s website at: investors.bakerhughes.com. An archived version of the webcast will be available on the website for one month following the webcast.

    Forward-Looking Statements

    This news release (and oral statements made regarding the subjects of this release) may contain forward-looking statements within the meaning of Section 27A of the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, and Section 21E of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, (each a “forward-looking statement”). Forward-looking statements concern future circumstances and results and other statements that are not historical facts and are sometimes identified by the words “may,” “will,” “should,” “potential,” “intend,” “expect,” “would,” “seek,” “anticipate,” “estimate,” “overestimate,” “underestimate,” “believe,” “could,” “project,” “predict,” “continue,” “target,” “goal” or other similar words or expressions. There are many risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from our forward-looking statements. These forward-looking statements are also affected by the risk factors described in the Company’s annual report on Form 10-K for the annual period ended December 31, 2024 and those set forth from time to time in other filings with the Securities and Exchange Commission (“SEC”). The documents are available through the Company’s website at: www.investors.bakerhughes.com or through the SEC’s Electronic Data Gathering and Analysis Retrieval system at: www.sec.gov. We undertake no obligation to publicly update or revise any forward-looking statement, except as required by law. Readers are cautioned not to place undue reliance on any of these forward-looking statements.

    Our expectations regarding our business outlook and business plans; the business plans of our customers; oil and natural gas market conditions; cost and availability of resources; economic, legal and regulatory conditions, and other matters are only our forecasts regarding these matters.

    These forward-looking statements, including forecasts, may be substantially different from actual results, which are affected by many risks, along with the following risk factors and the timing of any of these risk factors:

    • Economic and political conditions – the impact of worldwide economic conditions and rising inflation; the impact of tariffs and the potential for significant increases thereto; the impact of global trade policy and the potential for significant changes thereto; the effect that declines in credit availability may have on worldwide economic growth and demand for hydrocarbons; foreign currency exchange fluctuations and changes in the capital markets in locations where we operate; and the impact of government disruptions and sanctions.
    • Orders and RPO – our ability to execute on orders and RPO in accordance with agreed specifications, terms and conditions and convert those orders and RPO to revenue and cash.
    • Oil and gas market conditions – the level of petroleum industry exploration, development and production expenditures; the price of, volatility in pricing of, and the demand for crude oil and natural gas; drilling activity; drilling permits for and regulation of the shelf and the deepwater drilling; excess productive capacity; crude and product inventories; liquefied natural gas supply and demand; seasonal and other adverse weather conditions that affect the demand for energy; severe weather conditions, such as tornadoes and hurricanes, that affect exploration and production activities; Organization of Petroleum Exporting Countries (“OPEC”) policy and the adherence by OPEC nations to their OPEC production quotas.
    • Terrorism and geopolitical risks – war, military action, terrorist activities or extended periods of international conflict, particularly involving any petroleum-producing or consuming regions, including Russia and Ukraine; and the recent conflict in the Middle East; labor disruptions, civil unrest or security conditions where we operate; potentially burdensome taxation, expropriation of assets by governmental action; cybersecurity risks and cyber incidents or attacks; epidemic outbreaks.

    About Baker Hughes:

    Baker Hughes (Nasdaq: BKR) is an energy technology company that provides solutions to energy and industrial customers worldwide. Built on a century of experience and conducting business in over 120 countries, our innovative technologies and services are taking energy forward – making it safer, cleaner and more efficient for people and the planet. Visit us at bakerhughes.com.

    For more information, please contact:

    Investor Relations

    Chase Mulvehill
    +1 346-297-2561
    investor.relations@bakerhughes.com 

    Media Relations

    Adrienne Lynch
    +1 713-906-8407 
    adrienne.lynch@bakerhughes.com 

    The MIL Network

  • MIL-Evening Report: Even experts disagree over whether social media is bad for kids. We examined why

    Source: The Conversation (Au and NZ) – By Simon Knight, Associate Professor, Transdisciplinary School, University of Technology Sydney

    A low relief sculpture depicting Plato and Aristotle arguing adorning the external wall of Florence Cathedral. Krikkiat/Shutterstock

    Disagreement and uncertainty are common features of everyday life. They’re also common and expected features of scientific research.

    Despite this, disagreement among experts has the potential to undermine people’s engagement with information. It can also lead to confusion and a rejection of scientific messaging in general, with a tendency to explain disagreement as relating to incompetence or nefarious motivations.

    To help, we recently developed a tool to help people navigate uncertainty and disagreement.

    To illustrate its usefulness, we applied it to a recent topic which has attracted much disagreement (including among experts): whether social media is harmful for kids, and whether they should be banned from it.

    A structured way to understand disagreement

    We research how people navigate disagreement and uncertainty. The tool we developed is a framework of disagreements. It provides a structured way to understand expert disagreement, to assess evidence and navigate the issues for decision making.

    It identifies ten types of disagreement, and groups them into three categories:

    1. Informant-related (who is making the claim?)
    2. Information-related (what evidence is available and what is it about?)
    3. Uncertainty-related (how does the evidence help us understand the issue?)
    The framework for disagreements identifies ten types of disagreement, and groups them into three categories.
    Kristine Deroover/Simon Knight/Paul Burke/Tamara Bucher, CC BY-NC-ND

    Mapping different viewpoints

    The social and policy debate about the impacts of social media is rapidly evolving. This can present a challenge, as we try to apply evidence created through research to the messy realities of policy and decision making.

    As a proxy for what experts think, we reviewed articles in The Conversation that mention words relating to the social media ban and expert disagreement. This approach excludes articles published elsewhere. It also only focuses on explicit discussion of disagreement.

    However, The Conversation provides a useful source because articles are written by researchers, for a broad audience, allowing us to focus on clearly explained areas of acknowledged disagreement among researchers.

    We then analysed a set of articles by annotating quotes and text fragments that reflect different arguments and causes of disagreement.

    Importantly, we did not assess the quality of the arguments or evidence, as we assume the authors are qualified in their respective fields. Instead, we focused on the disagreements they highlighted, using the framework to map out differing viewpoints.

    We focused on the Australian context. But similar social media bans have been explored elsewhere, including in the United States.

    Young people under 16 will soon be banned from some social media in Australia.
    Kaspars Grinvalds

    What did we find?

    Applying our framework to this example revealed only a small amount of disagreement is informant-related.

    Most of the disagreement is information-related. More specifically, it stems from input and outcome ambiguity. That is, in claims such as “X causes Y”, how we define “X” and “Y”.

    For example, there is disagreement about the groups for whom social media may present particular risks and benefits and what those risks and benefits are. There is also disagreement about what exactly constitutes “social media use” and its particular technologies or features.

    Harms discussed often refer to mental wellbeing, including loneliness, anxiety, depression and envy. But harms also refer to undesirable attitudes such as polarisation and behaviours such as cyberbullying and offline violence. Similarly, benefits are sometimes, but not always, considered.

    The ban itself presents a further ambiguity, with discussion regarding what a “ban” would involve, its feasibility, and possible efficacy as compared to other policy options.

    Two other information-related causes of disagreement involve data availability and the type of evidence. Researchers often lack full access to data from social media companies, and recruiting teens for large-scale studies is challenging. Additionally, there is a shortage of causal evidence, as well as long-term, high-quality research on the topic.

    This information-related issue can combine with issues related to the uncertainty and complexity of science and real-world problems. This is the third category in our framework.

    First, while a contribution may be from an expert, there may be questions about the pertinence of their background expertise to the debate. Complex issues such as a social media ban also require human judgement in weighing, integrating, and interpreting evidence.

    Second, research on reducing social media use often yields varied results, which could stem from inherent uncertainty or the constantly evolving social media landscape, making it difficult to compare findings and establish firm conclusions (tentative knowledge).

    Researchers often lack full access to data from social media companies, which can make it difficult to conduct comprehensive studies.
    UVL/Shutterstock

    Why is this important?

    Discussion regarding the social media ban is complex, with a range of issues at play.

    By mapping out some of these issues, we hope to help people understand more about them and their implications.

    Our taxonomy of disagreements provides a structured way to understand different views, assess evidence, and make more informed decisions. It also supports clearer communication about disagreements as researchers navigate communicating in complex debates.

    We hope this helps people to integrate claims made across different sources. We also hope it helps people hone in on the source of disagreements to support better discourse across contexts – and ultimately better decision making.

    Simon Knight receives funding from the Australian government through the Australian Research Council (ARC) Discovery Early Career Award (DECRA) Fellowship (DE230100065), and Discovery Project (DP240100602). The views expressed herein are those of the authors and are not necessarily those of the Australian government or Australian Research Council. He also receives funding from the James Martin Institute Policy Challenge Grant scheme.

    Kristine Deroover received funding from the Australian Research Training Program for her PhD at the University of Technology Sydney, during which the work referenced in this article was conducted.

    ref. Even experts disagree over whether social media is bad for kids. We examined why – https://theconversation.com/even-experts-disagree-over-whether-social-media-is-bad-for-kids-we-examined-why-252500

    MIL OSI AnalysisEveningReport.nz

  • MIL-OSI Canada: Financial and Consumer Affairs Authority of Saskatchewan Joins Multi-Jurisdictional Settlement With GSB Gold Standard & GS Partners, Enabling Investor Refund Claims

    Source: Government of Canada regional news

    Released on April 22, 2025

    The Financial and Consumer Affairs Authority of Saskatchewan (FCAA), in collaboration with other provincial and U.S. state securities regulators has signed onto a multi-jurisdictional settlement with GSB Gold Standard Corporation AG, GSB Gold Standard Bank LTD, and affiliated entities known collectively as GS Partners, along with the group’s principal, Josip Heit. 

    The settlement was led by regulators in jurisdictions with a higher number of affected investors. The FCAA aims to protect the interests of Saskatchewan investors who made investments with GS Partners, as the agreement allows them to file claims for refunds of their investments. Under the terms of the settlement, GS Partners has agreed to cease trading in Saskatchewan unless it fully complies with securities laws. 

    Many of the investment products offered included digital assets and metaverse-related investments, such as: 

    • Certificates (or “Metacertificates”), including the Olympus, Elemental, and Success series, which allegedly encouraged purchasers to increase their value in order to unlock potential returns. 
    • G999 token – a digital asset deployed on a proprietary blockchain.
    • XLT Vouchers – digital assets representing ownership interests in a skyscraper.
    • Staking pool investments within a metaverse known as World.

    The entities, brands and platforms included in the agreement are: GSB Gold Standard Corporation AG; GSB Gold Standard Banking Corporation AG; GSB Gold Standard Corporation USA; GSB Gold Standard Pay LTD (brand name GSDeFi operating g999main.net); GSB Gold Standard Bank LTD dba GS Smart Finance, Gold Standard Partners, GSPartners, GS Partners, and GSP (marketing arm of the metaverse Lydian.World); GSB Gold Standard Banking Corporation PLC; GSB Gold Standard Pay Kommanditbolag aka GSB Gold Standard Pay KB; GS Trade; GSB Gold Standard Trade (virtual digital-asset platform for storing, transferring, obtaining, and exchanging digital assets); GS Digital Partners LLC; GSB Gold Standard B Corporation; GSB Premier Exchange Corporation LTD; GSB Gold Standard PLC; and GSB Money LTD. 

    How to File a Claim:

    As part of the settlement, GS Partners will compensate eligible investors through a claims process managed by AlixPartners LP. 

    Investors must file their claim no later than May 22, 2025. 

    When filing a claim, please be prepared to supply supporting documents and information. According to AlixPartners’ webpage, to file a claim, you will need the following information:

    • Proof of identity (name, address, valid ID).
    • Any Know Your Customer (KYC) materials provided to GS Partners.
    • Contact information (email and phone number).
    • Your GS Partners Account ID or username.
    • Claim amount, including:
      GS Partners account statements.
      Proof of deposits, withdrawals, and other transactions.
    • Wallet addresses used to interact with GS Partners.
    • Information about any previous compensation received from GS Partners.

    For questions or inquiries about the settlement or claims process, contact Brett Wawro of the FCAA.

    For details on how to submit a claim, visit gsbsettlement.com. (https://gsbsettlement.com.) 

    The FCAA acknowledges the efforts of the North American Securities Administrators Association (NASAA) working group, led by U.S. state securities regulators from Alabama, Arizona, Arkansas, California, Florida, Georgia, and Texas, as well as the British Columbia Securities Commission, who conducted the investigation and negotiated the settlement terms.

    -30-

    For more information, contact:

    MIL OSI Canada News

  • MIL-OSI: QCR Holdings, Inc. Announces Net Income of $25.8 Million for the First Quarter of 2025

    Source: GlobeNewswire (MIL-OSI)

    First Quarter 2025 Highlights

    • Net income of $25.8 million, or $1.52 per diluted share
    • Adjusted net income (non-GAAP) of $26.0 million, or $1.53 per diluted share
    • Adjusted NIM (TEY) (non-GAAP) expanded to 3.41%
    • Robust core deposit growth of 20% annualized
    • Wealth management revenue growth of 14% annualized
    • Tangible book value per share (non-GAAP) grew $1.43, or 11% annualized
    • TCE/TA ratio (non-GAAP) improved 15 basis points to 9.70%

    MOLINE, Ill., April 22, 2025 (GLOBE NEWSWIRE) — QCR Holdings, Inc. (NASDAQ: QCRH) (the “Company”) today announced quarterly net income of $25.8 million and diluted earnings per share (“EPS”) of $1.52 for the first quarter of 2025, compared to net income of $30.2 million and diluted EPS of $1.77 for the fourth quarter of 2024.

    Adjusted net income (non-GAAP) and adjusted diluted EPS for the first quarter of 2025 were $26.0 million and $1.53, respectively. For the fourth quarter of 2024, adjusted net income (non-GAAP) was $32.8 million and adjusted diluted EPS was $1.93. For the first quarter of 2024, adjusted net income (non-GAAP) was $26.9 million, and adjusted diluted EPS was $1.59.

      For the Quarter Ended
      March 31, December 31, March 31,
    $ in millions (except per share data)  2025  2024  2024
    Net Income $ 25.8 $ 30.2 $ 26.7
    Diluted EPS $ 1.52 $ 1.77 $ 1.58
    Adjusted Net Income (non-GAAP)* $ 26.0 $ 32.8 $ 26.9
    Adjusted Diluted EPS (non-GAAP)* $ 1.53 $ 1.93 $ 1.59
                 

    *Adjusted non-GAAP measurements of financial performance exclude non-core and/or nonrecurring income and expense items that management believes are not reflective of the anticipated future operation of the Company’s business. The Company believes these adjusted measurements provide a better comparison for analysis and may provide a better indicator of future performance. See GAAP to non-GAAP reconciliations.

    “Our first quarter results were highlighted by margin expansion, robust deposit growth, and disciplined expense management. We also had another quarter of strong wealth management revenue growth,” said Larry J. Helling, Chief Executive Officer. “Our performance was further bolstered by continued loan growth while maintaining our excellent asset quality, further strengthening our capital levels, and significantly increasing our tangible book value per share.”

    Margin Performance Continues

    Net interest income for the first quarter of 2025 totaled $60.0 million, a decrease of $1.2 million from the fourth quarter of 2024, but increased slightly when adjusted for fewer days in the first quarter.

    Net interest margin (“NIM”) was 2.95% and NIM on a tax-equivalent yield (“TEY”) basis (non-GAAP) was 3.42% for the first quarter, as compared to 2.95% and 3.43% for the prior quarter, respectively. Adjusted NIM TEY (non-GAAP) of 3.41% for the first quarter of 2025 increased one basis point compared to the fourth quarter of 2024.  

    “Our adjusted NIM, on a tax equivalent yield basis, increased one basis point from the fourth quarter of 2024 and was within our guidance range, overpowering the dilution from the impact of expired interest rate caps,” said Todd A. Gipple, President and Chief Financial Officer. “Absent the impact from the interest rate caps, our adjusted NIM TEY expanded by five basis points. Looking ahead, we anticipate continued margin expansion and are guiding to second quarter adjusted NIM TEY in the range from static to an increase of four basis points, assuming no Federal Reserve rate cuts,” added Mr. Gipple.

    Noninterest Income Driven by Capital Markets and Wealth Management Revenue

    Noninterest income for the first quarter of 2025 was influenced by macroeconomic factors, particularly affecting our low-income housing tax credit (“LIHTC”) lending business and its associated capital markets revenue. Noninterest income for the quarter totaled $16.9 million, down from $30.6 million in the fourth quarter of 2024. The Company generated $6.5 million of capital markets revenue during the first quarter, compared to $20.6 million in the prior quarter.

    “Our capital markets business was affected by macroeconomic uncertainty. Despite this, demand for affordable housing remains significant. The lower first quarter results in this sector should lead to a larger pipeline for future transactions. Our capital markets activity for the second quarter is normalizing as clients adjust to the current environment,” said Mr. Helling. “As a result, we continue to expect our capital markets revenue to be in a range of $50 to $60 million over the next four quarters. We believe the long-term demand and our growing backlog for new deals will support the sustainability of our LIHTC lending program,” added Mr. Helling.

    “Additionally, our wealth management business remained strong in the first quarter of 2025, generating annualized revenue growth of 14% for the quarter driven by growth in new client accounts and assets under management. We expect continued strong growth in this business to be fueled by the strategic investments we made in our Southwest Missouri and Central Iowa markets,” said Mr. Gipple.

    Significant Noninterest Expense Reduction

    Noninterest expense for the first quarter of 2025 totaled $46.5 million, a decrease compared to $53.5 million for the fourth quarter and $50.7 million for the first quarter of 2024. The $7.0 million linked-quarter decrease was primarily due to lower salary and employee benefits expenses associated with reduced variable compensation.

    “Our noninterest expense decreased by 13% during the quarter, primarily due to lower capital markets revenue and its impact on our variable compensation. As a result, expenses were well below the guided range of $52 to $55 million highlighting our expense flexibility,” said Mr. Gipple. “The Company’s efficiency ratio was 60.54% in the first quarter. For the second quarter of 2025 we expect noninterest expense to be in the range of $50 to $53 million which assumes both capital markets revenue and loan growth are within our guidance range,” added Mr. Gipple.

    Exceptionally Low Effective Tax Rate

    The effective tax rate for the first quarter of 2025 was 1%, down from 9% in the prior quarter. The linked quarter decline is primarily due to a combination of the tax benefits from equity compensation in the first quarter, new state tax credit investments, and lower pre-tax income from lower capital markets revenue. “These factors decreased the mix of our taxable income relative to our tax-exempt income. Our tax-exempt loan and bond portfolios have consistently helped us maintain our low tax liability benefiting our shareholders,” said Mr. Gipple. “Given a more normalized mix of revenue, we expect our effective tax rate to be in the range of 6% to 8% for the second quarter of 2025,” added Mr. Gipple.

    Robust Deposit Growth

    During the first quarter of 2025, core deposits increased by $332.2 million, or 20% annualized, which allowed the Company to decrease brokered deposits by $56.0 million, and overnight FHLB advances by $140 million. Gross loans and leases held for investment as a percentage of total deposits ratio improved to 92.96% from 96.05% from the prior quarter. “Our deposit growth this quarter reflects our strong execution in expanding market share and deepening relationships with both new and existing clients in our core markets,” added Mr. Helling.

    Continued Loan Growth

    In the first quarter of 2025, the Company’s total loans and leases held for investment grew by $38.9 million to $6.8 billion. “Loan growth was 4% annualized when adding back the impact from the runoff of m2 Equipment Finance loans. First quarter loan activity was influenced by heightened macroeconomic uncertainty and elevated payoffs. We anticipate that the slowdown in our LIHTC business during this period should lead to a larger pipeline of future activity driven by the ongoing significant demand for low-income housing,” stated Mr. Helling.

    “Due to heightened uncertainty, we are suspending our full-year loan growth guidance. Instead, we are providing guidance for the second quarter of 2025, projecting an annualized growth rate of 4% to 6%,” added Mr. Helling.

    Asset Quality Remains Excellent

    The Company’s nonperforming assets (“NPAs”) to total assets ratio was 0.53% on March 31, 2025, up three basis points from the prior quarter. NPAs totaled $48.1 million at the end of the first quarter of 2025, a $2.6 million increase from the prior quarter. The increase in NPAs during the first quarter was primarily due to the addition of three specific loans, partially offset by the payoff of our largest NPA in January.

    The Company’s total criticized loans, a leading indicator of asset quality, declined by $18.2 million on a linked-quarter basis, and the ratio of criticized loans to total loans and leases as of March 31, 2025, improved to 2.06%, as compared to 2.34% as of December 31, 2024. This $18.2 million reduction marks the Company’s lowest criticized loan ratio in five years.

    The Company recorded a total provision for credit losses of $4.2 million during the quarter, representing a decline of $0.9 million from the prior quarter. The reduction in the provision for credit losses during the quarter was primarily due to lower loan growth and a decrease in total criticized balances. Net charge-offs were also $4.2 million during the first quarter of 2025, an increase of $0.8 million from the prior quarter. The allowance for credit losses to total loans held for investment was unchanged from the prior quarter at 1.32%.

    Strong Tangible Book Value and Regulatory Capital Growth

    The Company’s tangible book value per share (non-GAAP) increased by $1.43, or 11% annualized, during the first quarter of 2025 due to the combination of strong earnings, a modest dividend, and negligible changes in accumulated other comprehensive income (“AOCI”).

    As of March 31, 2025, the Company’s tangible common equity to tangible assets ratio (“TCE”) (non-GAAP) increased 15 basis points to 9.70%. The improvement in TCE (non-GAAP) was driven by strong earnings as AOCI remained consistent during the quarter. The total risk-based capital ratio increased to 14.16% and the common equity tier 1 ratio increased to 10.26% due to solid earnings growth and modest loan growth during the quarter. By comparison, these ratios were 9.55%, 14.10%, and 10.03%, respectively, as of December 31, 2024. The Company remains focused on maintaining strong regulatory capital and targeting TCE (non-GAAP) in the top quartile of its peer group.

    Conference Call Details
    The Company will host an earnings call/webcast tomorrow, April 23, 2025, at Central Time. Dial-in information for the call is toll-free: 888-346-9286 (international 412-317-5253). Participants should request to join the QCR Holdings, Inc. call. The event will be available for replay through April 30, 2025. The replay access information is 877-344-7529 (international 412-317-0088); access code 7198237. A webcast of the teleconference can be accessed on the Company’s News and Events page at www.qcrh.com. An archived version of the webcast will be available at the same location shortly after the live event has ended.

    About Us
    QCR Holdings, Inc., headquartered in Moline, Illinois, is a relationship-driven, multi-bank holding company serving the Quad Cities, Cedar Rapids, Cedar Valley, Des Moines/Ankeny and Springfield communities through its wholly owned subsidiary banks. The banks provide full-service commercial and consumer banking and trust and wealth management services. Quad City Bank & Trust Company, based in Bettendorf, Iowa, commenced operations in 1994, Cedar Rapids Bank & Trust Company, based in Cedar Rapids, Iowa, commenced operations in 2001, Community State Bank, based in Ankeny, Iowa, was acquired by the Company in 2016, and Guaranty Bank, based in Springfield, Missouri, was acquired by the Company in 2018. Additionally, the Company serves the Waterloo/Cedar Falls, Iowa community through Community Bank & Trust, a division of Cedar Rapids Bank & Trust Company. The Company has 36 locations in Iowa, Missouri, and Illinois. As of March 31, 2025, the Company had $9.2 billion in assets, $6.8 billion in loans and $7.3 billion in deposits. For additional information, please visit the Company’s website at www.qcrh.com.

    Special Note Concerning Forward-Looking Statements. This document contains, and future oral and written statements of the Company and its management may contain, forward-looking statements within the meaning of the Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995 with respect to the financial condition, results of operations, plans, objectives, future performance and business of the Company. Forward-looking statements, which may be based upon beliefs, expectations and assumptions of the Company’s management and on information currently available to management, are generally identifiable by the use of words such as “believe,” “expect,” “anticipate,” “bode”, “predict,” “suggest,” “project”, “appear,” “plan,” “intend,” “estimate,” ”annualize,” “may,” “will,” “would,” “could,” “should,” “likely,” “might,” “potential,” “continue,” “annualized,” “target,” “outlook,” as well as the negative forms of those words, or other similar expressions. Additionally, all statements in this document, including forward-looking statements, speak only as of the date they are made, and the Company undertakes no obligation to update any statement in light of new information or future events.

    A number of factors, many of which are beyond the ability of the Company to control or predict, could cause actual results to differ materially from those in its forward-looking statements. These factors include, but are not limited to: (i) the strength of the local, state, national and international economies and financial markets, including effects of inflationary pressures, the threat or implementation of tariffs, trade wars and changes to immigration policy; (ii) changes in, and the interpretation and prioritization of, local, state and federal laws, regulations and governmental policies (including those concerning the Company’s general business); (iii) the economic impact of any future terrorist threats and attacks, widespread disease or pandemics, acts of war or threats thereof (including the Russian invasion of Ukraine and ongoing conflicts in the Middle East), or other adverse events that could cause economic deterioration or instability in credit markets, and the response of the local, state and national governments to any such adverse external events; (iv) new or revised accounting policies and practices, as may be adopted by state and federal regulatory agencies, the FASB, the Securities and Exchange Commission (the “SEC”) or the PCAOB; (v) the imposition of tariffs or other governmental policies impacting the value of products produced by the Company’s commercial borrowers; (vi) increased competition in the financial services sector, including from non-bank competitors such as credit unions and fintech companies, and the inability to attract new customers; (vii) changes in technology and the ability to develop and maintain secure and reliable electronic systems; (viii) unexpected results of acquisitions, including failure to realize the anticipated benefits of the acquisitions and the possibility that transaction and integration costs may be greater than anticipated; (ix) the loss of key executives and employees, talent shortages and employee turnover; (x) changes in consumer spending; (xi) unexpected outcomes and costs of existing or new litigation or other legal proceedings and regulatory actions involving the Company; (xii) the economic impact on the Company and its customers of climate change, natural disasters and exceptional weather occurrences such as tornadoes, floods and blizzards; (xiii) fluctuations in the value of securities held in our securities portfolio, including as a result of changes in interest rates; (xiv) credit risk and risks from concentrations (by type of borrower, geographic area, collateral and industry) within our loan portfolio and large loans to certain borrowers (including CRE loans); (xv) the overall health of the local and national real estate market; (xvi) the ability to maintain an adequate level of allowance for credit losses on loans; (xvii) the concentration of large deposits from certain clients who have balances above current FDIC insurance limits and who may withdraw deposits to diversify their exposure; (xviii) the ability to successfully manage liquidity risk, which may increase dependence on non-core funding sources such as brokered deposits, and may negatively impact the Company’s cost of funds; (xix) the level of non-performing assets on our balance sheet; (xx) interruptions involving our information technology and communications systems or third-party servicers; (xxi) the occurrence of fraudulent activity, breaches or failures of our third-party vendors’ information security controls or cybersecurity-related incidents, including as a result of sophisticated attacks using artificial intelligence and similar tools or as a result of insider fraud; (xxii) changes in the interest rates and repayment rates of the Company’s assets; (xxiii) the effectiveness of the Company’s risk management framework, and (xxiv) the ability of the Company to manage the risks associated with the foregoing. These risks and uncertainties should be considered in evaluating forward-looking statements and undue reliance should not be placed on such statements. Additional information concerning the Company and its business, including additional factors that could materially affect the Company’s financial results, is included in the Company’s filings with the SEC.

    Contact:
    Todd A. Gipple
    President
    Chief Financial Officer
    (309) 743-7745
    tgipple@qcrh.com

      QCR Holding, Inc.
    Consolidated Financial Highlights
    (Unaudited)
                 
        As of
        March 31, December 31, September 30, June 30, March 31,
         2025   2024   2024   2024   2024 
                 
        (dollars in thousands)
                 
      CONDENSED BALANCE SHEET          
                 
      Cash and due from banks $ 98,994   $ 91,732   $ 103,840   $ 92,173   $ 80,988  
      Federal funds sold and interest-bearing deposits   225,716     170,592     159,159     102,262     77,020  
      Securities, net of allowance for credit losses   1,220,717     1,200,435     1,146,046     1,033,199     1,031,861  
      Loans receivable held for sale (1)   2,025     2,143     167,047     246,124     275,344  
      Loans/leases receivable held for investment   6,821,142     6,782,261     6,661,755     6,608,262     6,372,992  
      Allowance for credit losses   (90,354 )   (89,841 )   (86,321 )   (87,706 )   (84,470 )
      Intangibles   10,400     11,061     11,751     12,441     13,131  
      Goodwill   138,595     138,595     138,596     139,027     139,027  
      Derivatives   180,997     186,781     261,913     194,354     183,888  
      Other assets   544,547     532,271     524,779     531,855     509,768  
      Total assets $ 9,152,779   $ 9,026,030   $ 9,088,565   $ 8,871,991   $ 8,599,549  
                 
      Total deposits $ 7,337,390   $ 7,061,187   $ 6,984,633   $ 6,764,667   $ 6,806,775  
      Total borrowings   429,921     569,532     660,344     768,671     489,633  
      Derivatives   206,925     214,823     285,769     221,798     211,677  
      Other liabilities   155,796     183,101     181,199     180,536     184,122  
      Total stockholders’ equity   1,022,747     997,387     976,620     936,319     907,342  
      Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity $ 9,152,779   $ 9,026,030   $ 9,088,565   $ 8,871,991   $ 8,599,549  
                 
      ANALYSIS OF LOAN PORTFOLIO          
      Loan/lease mix: (2)          
      Commercial and industrial – revolving $ 388,479   $ 387,991   $ 387,409   $ 362,115   $ 326,129  
      Commercial and industrial – other   1,231,198     1,295,961     1,321,053     1,370,561     1,374,333  
      Commercial and industrial – other – LIHTC   212,921     218,971     89,028     92,637     96,276  
      Total commercial and industrial   1,832,598     1,902,923     1,797,490     1,825,313     1,796,738  
      Commercial real estate, owner occupied   599,488     605,993     622,072     633,596     621,069  
      Commercial real estate, non-owner occupied   1,040,281     1,077,852     1,103,694     1,082,457     1,055,089  
      Construction and land development   403,001     395,557     342,335     331,454     410,918  
      Construction and land development – LIHTC   1,016,207     917,986     913,841     750,894     738,609  
      Multi-family   289,782     303,662     324,090     329,239     296,245  
      Multi-family – LIHTC   888,517     828,448     973,682     1,148,244     1,007,321  
      Direct financing leases   14,773     17,076     19,241     25,808     28,089  
      1-4 family real estate   592,127     588,179     587,512     583,542     563,358  
      Consumer   146,393     146,728     144,845     143,839     130,900  
      Total loans/leases $ 6,823,167   $ 6,784,404   $ 6,828,802   $ 6,854,386   $ 6,648,336  
      Less allowance for credit losses   90,354     89,841     86,321     87,706     84,470  
      Net loans/leases $ 6,732,813   $ 6,694,563   $ 6,742,481   $ 6,766,680   $ 6,563,866  
                 
                 
      ANALYSIS OF SECURITIES PORTFOLIO          
      Securities mix:          
      U.S. government sponsored agency securities $ 17,487   $ 20,591   $ 18,621   $ 20,101   $ 14,442  
      Municipal securities   1,003,985     971,567     965,810     885,046     884,469  
      Residential mortgage-backed and related securities   43,194     50,042     53,488     54,708     56,071  
      Asset backed securities   7,764     9,224     10,455     12,721     14,285  
      Other securities   66,105     65,745     39,190     38,464     40,539  
      Trading securities (3)   82,445     83,529     58,685     22,362     22,258  
      Total securities $ 1,220,980   $ 1,200,698   $ 1,146,249   $ 1,033,402   $ 1,032,064  
      Less allowance for credit losses   263     263     203     203     203  
      Net securities $ 1,220,717   $ 1,200,435   $ 1,146,046   $ 1,033,199   $ 1,031,861  
                 
      ANALYSIS OF DEPOSITS          
      Deposit mix:          
      Noninterest-bearing demand deposits $ 963,851   $ 921,160   $ 969,348   $ 956,445   $ 955,167  
      Interest-bearing demand deposits   5,119,601     4,828,216     4,715,087     4,644,918     4,714,555  
      Time deposits   951,606     953,496     942,847     859,593     875,491  
      Brokered deposits   302,332     358,315     357,351     303,711     261,562  
      Total deposits $ 7,337,390   $ 7,061,187   $ 6,984,633   $ 6,764,667   $ 6,806,775  
                 
      ANALYSIS OF BORROWINGS          
      Borrowings mix:          
      Term FHLB advances $ 145,383   $ 145,383   $ 145,383   $ 135,000   $ 135,000  
      Overnight FHLB advances       140,000     230,000     350,000     70,000  
      Other short-term borrowings   2,050     1,800     2,750     1,600     2,700  
      Subordinated notes   233,595     233,489     233,383     233,276     233,170  
      Junior subordinated debentures   48,893     48,860     48,828     48,795     48,763  
      Total borrowings $ 429,921   $ 569,532   $ 660,344   $ 768,671   $ 489,633  
                 
    (1 ) Loans with a fair value of $0 million, $0 million, $165.9 million, $243.2 million and $274.8 million have been identified for securitization and are included in LHFS at March 31, 2025, December 31, 2024, September 30, 2024, June 30, 2024 and March 31, 2024, respectively.
    (2 ) Loan categories with significant LIHTC loan balances have been broken out separately. Total LIHTC balances within the loan/lease portfolio were $2.2 billion at March 31, 2025.
    (3 ) Trading securities consisted of retained beneficial interests acquired in conjunction with Freddie Mac securitizations completed by the Company.
                 
    QCR Holding, Inc.
    Consolidated Financial Highlights
    (Unaudited)
                 
        For the Quarter Ended
        March 31, December 31, September 30, June 30, March 31,
         2025   2024   2024   2024  2024 
                 
        (dollars in thousands, except per share data)
                 
    INCOME STATEMENT            
    Interest income   $ 116,673   $ 121,642   $ 125,420   $ 119,746 $ 115,049  
    Interest expense     56,687     60,438     65,698     63,583   60,350  
    Net interest income     59,986     61,204     59,722     56,163   54,699  
    Provision for credit losses     4,234     5,149     3,484     5,496   2,969  
    Net interest income after provision for credit losses   $ 55,752   $ 56,055   $ 56,238   $ 50,667 $ 51,730  
                 
                 
    Trust fees (1)   $ 3,686   $ 3,456   $ 3,270   $ 3,103 $ 3,199  
    Investment advisory and management fees (1)     1,254     1,320     1,229     1,214   1,101  
    Deposit service fees     2,183     2,228     2,294     1,986   2,022  
    Gains on sales of residential real estate loans, net     297     734     385     540   382  
    Gains on sales of government guaranteed portions of loans, net     61     49         12   24  
    Capital markets revenue     6,516     20,552     16,290     17,758   16,457  
    Earnings on bank-owned life insurance     524     797     814     2,964   868  
    Debit card fees     1,488     1,555     1,575     1,571   1,466  
    Correspondent banking fees     614     560     507     510   512  
    Loan related fee income     898     950     949     962   836  
    Fair value gain (loss) on derivatives and trading securities     (1,007 )   (1,781 )   (886 )   51   (163 )
    Other     378     205     730     218   154  
    Total noninterest income   $ 16,892   $ 30,625   $ 27,157   $ 30,889 $ 26,858  
                 
                 
    Salaries and employee benefits   $ 27,364   $ 33,610   $ 31,637   $ 31,079 $ 31,860  
    Occupancy and equipment expense     6,455     6,354     6,168     6,377   6,514  
    Professional and data processing fees     5,144     5,480     4,457     4,823   4,613  
    Restructuring expense             1,954        
    FDIC insurance, other insurance and regulatory fees     1,970     1,934     1,711     1,854   1,945  
    Loan/lease expense     381     513     587     151   378  
    Net cost of (income from) and gains/losses on operations of other real estate     (9 )   23     (42 )   28   (30 )
    Advertising and marketing     1,613     1,886     2,124     1,565   1,483  
    Communication and data connectivity     290     345     333     318   401  
    Supplies     207     252     278     259   275  
    Bank service charges     596     635     603     622   568  
    Correspondent banking expense     329     328     325     363   305  
    Intangibles amortization     661     691     690     690   690  
    Goodwill impairment             431        
    Payment card processing     594     516     785     706   646  
    Trust expense     357     381     395     379   425  
    Other     587     551     1,129     674   617  
    Total noninterest expense   $ 46,539   $ 53,499   $ 53,565   $ 49,888 $ 50,690  
                 
    Net income before income taxes   $ 26,105   $ 33,181   $ 29,830   $ 31,668 $ 27,898  
    Federal and state income tax expense     308     2,956     2,045     2,554   1,172  
    Net income   $ 25,797   $ 30,225   $ 27,785   $ 29,114 $ 26,726  
                 
    Basic EPS   $ 1.53   $ 1.80   $ 1.65   $ 1.73 $ 1.59  
    Diluted EPS   $ 1.52   $ 1.77   $ 1.64   $ 1.72 $ 1.58  
                 
                 
    Weighted average common shares outstanding     16,900,785     16,871,652     16,846,200     16,814,814   16,783,348  
    Weighted average common and common equivalent shares outstanding   17,013,992     17,024,481     16,982,400     16,921,854   16,910,675  
                 
    (1) Trust fees and investment advisory and management fees when combined are referred to as wealth management revenue.
      QCR Holding, Inc.
    Consolidated Financial Highlights
    (Unaudited)
                 
        As of and for the Quarter Ended
        March 31, December 31, September 30, June 30, March 31,
         2025   2024   2024   2024   2024 
                 
        (dollars in thousands, except per share data)
                 
      COMMON SHARE DATA          
      Common shares outstanding   16,920,363     16,882,045     16,861,108     16,824,985     16,807,056  
      Book value per common share (1) $ 60.44   $ 59.08   $ 57.92   $ 55.65   $ 53.99  
      Tangible book value per common share (Non-GAAP) (2) $ 51.64   $ 50.21   $ 49.00   $ 46.65   $ 44.93  
      Closing stock price $ 71.32   $ 80.64   $ 74.03   $ 60.00   $ 60.74  
      Market capitalization $ 1,206,760   $ 1,361,368   $ 1,248,228   $ 1,009,499   $ 1,020,861  
      Market price / book value   117.99 %   136.49 %   127.81 %   107.82 %   112.51 %
      Market price / tangible book value   138.11 %   160.59 %   151.07 %   128.62 %   135.18 %
      Earnings per common share (basic) LTM (3) $ 6.71   $ 6.77   $ 6.93   $ 6.78   $ 6.75  
      Price earnings ratio LTM (3) 10.63 x 11.91 x 10.68 x 8.85 x 9.00 x
      TCE / TA (Non-GAAP) (4)   9.70 %   9.55 %   9.24 %   9.00 %   8.94 %
                 
                 
      CONDENSED STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN STOCKHOLDERS’ EQUITY  
      Beginning balance $ 997,387   $ 976,620   $ 936,319   $ 907,342   $ 886,596  
      Net income   25,797     30,225     27,785     29,114     26,726  
      Other comprehensive income (loss), net of tax   404     (9,628 )   12,057     (368 )   (5,373 )
      Common stock cash dividends declared   (1,015 )   (1,013 )   (1,012 )   (1,008 )   (1,008 )
      Other (5)   174     1,183     1,471     1,239     401  
      Ending balance $ 1,022,747   $ 997,387   $ 976,620   $ 936,319   $ 907,342  
                 
                 
      REGULATORY CAPITAL RATIOS (6):          
      Total risk-based capital ratio   14.16 %   14.10 %   13.87 %   14.21 %   14.30 %
      Tier 1 risk-based capital ratio   10.79 %   10.57 %   10.33 %   10.49 %   10.50 %
      Tier 1 leverage capital ratio   11.06 %   10.73 %   10.50 %   10.40 %   10.33 %
      Common equity tier 1 ratio   10.26 %   10.03 %   9.79 %   9.92 %   9.91 %
                 
                 
      KEY PERFORMANCE RATIOS AND OTHER METRICS          
      Return on average assets (annualized)   1.14 %   1.34 %   1.24 %   1.33 %   1.25 %
      Return on average total equity (annualized)   10.14 %   12.15 %   11.55 %   12.63 %   11.83 %
      Net interest margin   2.95 %   2.95 %   2.90 %   2.82 %   2.82 %
      Net interest margin (TEY) (Non-GAAP)(7)   3.42 %   3.43 %   3.37 %   3.27 %   3.25 %
      Efficiency ratio (Non-GAAP) (8)   60.54 %   58.26 %   61.65 %   57.31 %   62.15 %
      Gross loans/leases held for investment / total assets   74.53 %   75.14 %   73.30 %   74.48 %   74.11 %
      Gross loans/leases held for investment / total deposits   92.96 %   96.05 %   95.38 %   97.69 %   93.63 %
      Effective tax rate   1.18 %   8.91 %   6.86 %   8.06 %   4.20 %
      Full-time equivalent employees   972     980     976     988     986  
                 
                 
      AVERAGE BALANCES          
      Assets $ 9,015,439   $ 9,050,280   $ 8,968,653   $ 8,776,002   $ 8,550,855  
      Loans/leases   6,790,312     6,839,153     6,840,527     6,779,075     6,598,614  
      Deposits   7,146,286     7,109,567     6,858,196     6,687,188     6,595,453  
      Total stockholders’ equity   1,017,487     995,012     962,302     921,986     903,371  
                 
                 
    (1 ) Includes accumulated other comprehensive income (loss).    
    (2 ) Includes accumulated other comprehensive income (loss) and excludes intangible assets. See GAAP to Non-GAAP reconciliations.
    (3 ) LTM : Last twelve months.     
    (4 ) TCE / TCA : tangible common equity / total tangible assets. See GAAP to non-GAAP reconciliations.  
    (5 ) Includes mostly common stock issued for options exercised and the employee stock purchase plan, as well as stock-based compensation.
    (6 ) Ratios for the current quarter are subject to change upon final calculation for regulatory filings due after earnings release.
    (7 ) TEY : Tax equivalent yield. See GAAP to Non-GAAP reconciliations.
    (8 ) See GAAP to Non-GAAP reconciliations.     
                 
    QCR Holding, Inc.
    Consolidated Financial Highlights
    (Unaudited)
                               
                               
      ANALYSIS OF NET INTEREST INCOME AND MARGIN                  
                               
          For the Quarter Ended
          March 31, 2025   December 31, 2024   March 31, 2024
          Average
    Balance
    Interest
    Earned or
    Paid
    Average
    Yield or Cost
      Average
    Balance
    Interest
    Earned or
    Paid
    Average
    Yield or Cost
      Average
    Balance
    Interest
    Earned or
    Paid
    Average
    Yield or Cost
                               
          (dollars in thousands)
                               
      Fed funds sold   $ 9,009 $ 99 4.40 %   $ 5,617 $ 67 4.68 %   $ 19,955 $ 269 5.42 %
      Interest-bearing deposits at financial institutions   166,897   1,804 4.38 %     158,151   1,823 4.59 %     91,557   1,200 5.27 %
      Investment securities – taxable   400,779   4,588 4.59 %     375,552   4,230 4.49 %     373,540   4,261 4.55 %
      Investment securities – nontaxable (1)   843,476   11,722 5.57 %     829,544   12,286 5.92 %     685,969   9,349 5.45 %
      Restricted investment securities   30,562   534 6.99 %     33,173   608 7.17 %     38,085   674 7.00 %
      Loans (1)     6,790,312   107,439 6.42 %     6,839,153   112,325 6.53 %     6,598,614   107,673 6.56 %
      Total earning assets (1) $ 8,241,035 $ 126,186 6.20 %   $ 8,241,190 $ 131,339 6.34 %   $ 7,807,720 $ 123,426 6.35 %
                               
      Interest-bearing deposits $ 5,005,853 $ 37,698 3.05 %   $ 4,881,914 $ 39,408 3.21 %   $ 4,529,325 $ 39,072 3.47 %
      Time deposits     1,204,593   12,690 4.27 %     1,248,412   13,868 4.42 %     1,107,622   12,345 4.48 %
      Short-term borrowings   1,839   18 3.97 %     1,862   22 4.67 %     1,763   23 5.16 %
      Federal Home Loan Bank advances   177,883   1,996 4.49 %     236,525   2,802 4.64 %     355,220   4,738 5.28 %
      Subordinated debentures   233,525   3,601 6.17 %     233,419   3,636 6.23 %     233,101   3,480 5.97 %
      Junior subordinated debentures   48,871   684 5.60 %     48,839   701 5.62 %     48,742   692 5.62 %
      Total interest-bearing liabilities $ 6,672,564 $ 56,687 3.44 %   $ 6,650,971 $ 60,437 3.61 %   $ 6,275,773 $ 60,350 3.86 %
                               
      Net interest income (1)   $ 69,499       $ 70,902       $ 63,076  
      Net interest margin (2)     2.95 %       2.95 %       2.82 %
      Net interest margin (TEY) (Non-GAAP) (1) (2) (3)     3.42 %       3.43 %       3.25 %
      Adjusted net interest margin (TEY) (Non-GAAP) (1) (2) (3)     3.41 %       3.40 %       3.24 %
      Cost of funds (4)       3.02 %       3.15 %       3.35 %
                               
                               
    (1 ) Includes nontaxable securities and loans. Interest earned and yields on nontaxable securities and loans are determined on a tax equivalent basis using a 21% effective federal tax rate. 
    (2 ) See “Select Financial Data – Subsidiaries” for a breakdown of amortization/accretion included in net interest margin for each period presented.
    (3 ) TEY : Tax equivalent yield. See GAAP to Non-GAAP reconciliations.
    (4 ) Cost of funds includes the effect of noninterest-bearing deposits.
      QCR Holding, Inc.
    Consolidated Financial Highlights
    (Unaudited)
     
                 
        As of
        March 31, December 31, September 30, June 30, March 31,
         2025   2024   2024   2024   2024 
                 
        (dollars in thousands, except per share data)
                 
      ROLLFORWARD OF ALLOWANCE FOR CREDIT LOSSES ON LOANS/LEASES          
      Beginning balance $ 89,841   $ 86,321   $ 87,706   $ 84,470   $ 87,200  
      Change in ACL for transfer of loans to LHFS       93     (1,812 )   498     (3,377 )
      Credit loss expense   4,743     6,832     3,828     4,343     3,736  
      Loans/leases charged off   (4,944 )   (4,787 )   (3,871 )   (1,751 )   (3,560 )
      Recoveries on loans/leases previously charged off   714     1,382     470     146     471  
      Ending balance $ 90,354   $ 89,841   $ 86,321   $ 87,706   $ 84,470  
                 
                 
      NONPERFORMING ASSETS          
      Nonaccrual loans/leases $ 47,259   $ 40,080   $ 33,480   $ 33,546   $ 29,439  
      Accruing loans/leases past due 90 days or more   356     4,270     1,298     87     142  
      Total nonperforming loans/leases   47,615     44,350     34,778     33,633     29,581  
      Other real estate owned   402     661     369     369     784  
      Other repossessed assets   122     543     542     512     962  
      Total nonperforming assets $ 48,139   $ 45,554   $ 35,689   $ 34,514   $ 31,327  
                 
                 
      ASSET QUALITY RATIOS          
      Nonperforming assets / total assets   0.53 %   0.50 %   0.39 %   0.39 %   0.36 %
      ACL for loans and leases / total loans/leases held for investment   1.32 %   1.32 %   1.30 %   1.33 %   1.33 %
      ACL for loans and leases / nonperforming loans/leases   189.76 %   202.57 %   248.21 %   260.77 %   285.55 %
      Net charge-offs as a % of average loans/leases   0.06 %   0.05 %   0.05 %   0.02 %   0.05 %
                 
                 
                 
      INTERNALLY ASSIGNED RISK RATING (1)          
      Special mention $ 55,327   $ 73,636   $ 80,121   $ 85,096   $ 111,729  
      Substandard (2)   85,033     84,930     70,022     80,345     70,841  
      Doubtful (2)                    
      Total Criticized loans (3) $ 140,360   $ 158,566   $ 150,143   $ 165,441   $ 182,570  
                 
      Classified loans as a % of total loans/leases (2)   1.25 %   1.25 %   1.03 %   1.17 %   1.07 %
      Total Criticized loans as a % of total loans/leases (3)   2.06 %   2.34 %   2.20 %   2.41 %   2.75 %
                 
    (1 ) Amounts exclude the government guaranteed portion, if any. The Company assigns internal risk ratings of Pass for the government guaranteed portion.
    (2 ) Classified loans are defined as loans with internally assigned risk ratings of 10 or 11, regardless of performance, and include loans identified as Substandard or Doubtful.
    (3 ) Total Criticized loans are defined as loans with internally assigned risk ratings of 9, 10, or 11 , regardless of performance, and include loans identified as Special Mention, Substandard, or Doubtful.
                                     
    QCR Holding, Inc.
    Consolidated Financial Highlights
    (Unaudited)
                   
                   
          For the Quarter Ended
          March 31,   December 31,   March 31,
      SELECT FINANCIAL DATA – SUBSIDIARIES    2025     2024     2024 
          (dollars in thousands)
                   
      TOTAL ASSETS            
      Quad City Bank and Trust (1)   $ 2,777,634     $ 2,588,587     $ 2,618,727  
      m2 Equipment Finance, LLC     276,096       310,915       350,801  
      Cedar Rapids Bank and Trust     2,617,143       2,614,570       2,423,936  
      Community State Bank     1,583,646       1,531,559       1,445,230  
      Guaranty Bank     2,331,944       2,342,958       2,327,985  
                   
      TOTAL DEPOSITS            
      Quad City Bank and Trust (1)   $ 2,397,047     $ 2,126,566     $ 2,161,515  
      Cedar Rapids Bank and Trust     1,883,952       1,882,487       1,757,353  
      Community State Bank     1,238,307       1,256,938       1,187,926  
      Guaranty Bank     1,840,774       1,824,139       1,743,514  
                   
      TOTAL LOANS & LEASES            
      Quad City Bank and Trust (1)   $ 2,041,181     $ 2,048,926     $ 2,046,038  
      m2 Equipment Finance, LLC     284,983       320,237       354,815  
      Cedar Rapids Bank and Trust     1,790,065       1,761,467       1,680,127  
      Community State Bank     1,197,005       1,159,389       1,113,070  
      Guaranty Bank     1,794,915       1,814,622       1,809,101  
                   
      TOTAL LOANS & LEASES / TOTAL DEPOSITS            
      Quad City Bank and Trust (1)     85 %     96 %     95 %
      Cedar Rapids Bank and Trust     95 %     94 %     96 %
      Community State Bank     97 %     92 %     94 %
      Guaranty Bank     98 %     99 %     104 %
                   
                   
      TOTAL LOANS & LEASES / TOTAL ASSETS            
      Quad City Bank and Trust (1)     73 %     79 %     78 %
      Cedar Rapids Bank and Trust     68 %     67 %     69 %
      Community State Bank     76 %     76 %     77 %
      Guaranty Bank     77 %     77 %     78 %
                   
      ACL ON LOANS/LEASES HELD FOR INVESTMENT AS A PERCENTAGE OF LOANS/LEASES HELD FOR INVESTMENT            
      Quad City Bank and Trust (1)     1.44 %     1.49 %     1.40 %
      m2 Equipment Finance, LLC     4.37 %     4.22 %     3.75 %
      Cedar Rapids Bank and Trust     1.38 %     1.44 %     1.34 %
      Community State Bank     1.08 %     0.98 %     1.12 %
      Guaranty Bank     1.30 %     1.25 %     1.15 %
                   
      RETURN ON AVERAGE ASSETS (ANNUALIZED)            
      Quad City Bank and Trust (1)     1.31 %     1.09 %     0.79 %
      Cedar Rapids Bank and Trust     2.14 %     3.12 %     3.09 %
      Community State Bank     1.07 %     1.30 %     1.25 %
      Guaranty Bank     0.72 %     0.91 %     0.88 %
                   
      NET INTEREST MARGIN PERCENTAGE (2)            
      Quad City Bank and Trust (1)     3.45 %     3.53 %     3.31 %
      Cedar Rapids Bank and Trust     4.00 %     3.95 %     3.77 %
      Community State Bank     3.78 %     3.77 %     3.75 %
      Guaranty Bank (3)     3.05 %     3.18 %     2.98 %
                   
      ACQUISITION-RELATED AMORTIZATION/ACCRETION INCLUDED IN NET        
      INTEREST MARGIN, NET            
      Cedar Rapids Bank and Trust   $     $     $  
      Community State Bank     (1 )     (1 )     (1 )
      Guaranty Bank     218       504       396  
      QCR Holdings, Inc. (4)     (33 )     (32 )     (32 )
                   
    (1 ) Quad City Bank and Trust amounts include m2 Equipment Finance, LLC, as this entity is wholly-owned and consolidated with the Bank. m2 Equipment Finance, LLC is also presented separately for certain (applicable) measurements.
    (2 ) Includes nontaxable securities and loans. Interest earned and yields on nontaxable securities and loans are determined on a tax equivalent basis using a 21% effective federal tax rate.
    (3 ) Guaranty Bank’s net interest margin percentage includes various purchase accounting adjustments. Excluding those adjustments, net interest margin (Non-GAAP) would have been 2.91% for the quarter ended March 31, 2025, 2.97% for the quarter ended December 31, 2024 and 2.91% for the quarter ended March 31, 2024.
    (4 ) Relates to the trust preferred securities acquired as part of the Guaranty Bank acquisition in 2017 and the Community National Bank acquisition in 2013.
         
      QCR Holding, Inc.
    Consolidated Financial Highlights
    (Unaudited)
                           
          As of
          March 31,   December 31,   September 30,   June 30,   March 31,
      GAAP TO NON-GAAP RECONCILIATIONS    2025     2024     2024     2024     2024 
          (dollars in thousands, except per share data)
      TANGIBLE COMMON EQUITY TO TANGIBLE ASSETS RATIO (1)                    
                           
      Stockholders’ equity (GAAP)   $ 1,022,747     $ 997,387     $ 976,620     $ 936,319     $ 907,342  
      Less: Intangible assets     148,995       149,657       150,347       151,468       152,158  
      Tangible common equity (non-GAAP)   $ 873,752     $ 847,730     $ 826,273     $ 784,851     $ 755,184  
                           
      Total assets (GAAP)   $ 9,152,779     $ 9,026,030     $ 9,088,565     $ 8,871,991     $ 8,599,549  
      Less: Intangible assets     148,995       149,657       150,347       151,468       152,158  
      Tangible assets (non-GAAP)   $ 9,003,784     $ 8,876,373     $ 8,938,218     $ 8,720,523     $ 8,447,391  
                           
      Tangible common equity to tangible assets ratio (non-GAAP)   9.70 %     9.55 %     9.24 %     9.00 %     8.94 %
                           
                           
    (1 ) This ratio is a non-GAAP financial measure. The Company’s management believes that this measurement is important to many investors in the marketplace who are interested in changes period-to-period in common equity. In compliance with applicable rules of the SEC, this non-GAAP measure is reconciled to stockholders’ equity and total assets, which are the most directly comparable GAAP financial measures.
      QCR Holding, Inc.
    Consolidated Financial Highlights
    (Unaudited)
                           
      GAAP TO NON-GAAP RECONCILIATIONS   For the Quarter Ended
          March 31,   December 31,   September 30,   June 30,   March 31,
      ADJUSTED NET INCOME (1)    2025     2024     2024     2024     2024 
          (dollars in thousands, except per share data)
                           
      Net income (GAAP)   $ 25,797     $ 30,225     $ 27,785     $ 29,114     $ 26,726  
                           
      Less non-core items (post-tax) (2):                    
      Income:                    
      Fair value loss on derivatives, net     (156 )     (2,594 )     (542 )     (145 )     (144 )
      Total non-core income (non-GAAP)   $ (156 )   $ (2,594 )   $ (542 )   $ (145 )   $ (144 )
                           
      Expense:                    
      Goodwill impairment                 431              
      Restructuring expense                 1,544              
      Total non-core expense (non-GAAP)   $     $     $ 1,975     $     $  
                           
                           
      Adjusted net income (non-GAAP) (1)   $ 25,953     $ 32,819     $ 30,302     $ 29,259     $ 26,870  
                           
      ADJUSTED EARNINGS PER COMMON SHARE (1)                    
                           
      Adjusted net income (non-GAAP) (from above)   $ 25,953     $ 32,819     $ 30,302     $ 29,259     $ 26,870  
                           
      Weighted average common shares outstanding     16,900,785       16,871,652       16,846,200       16,814,814       16,783,348  
      Weighted average common and common equivalent shares outstanding     17,013,992       17,024,481       16,982,400       16,921,854       16,910,675  
                           
      Adjusted earnings per common share (non-GAAP):                    
      Basic   $ 1.54     $ 1.95     $ 1.80     $ 1.74     $ 1.60  
      Diluted   $ 1.53     $ 1.93     $ 1.78     $ 1.73     $ 1.59  
                           
      ADJUSTED RETURN ON AVERAGE ASSETS AND AVERAGE EQUITY (1)                    
                           
      Adjusted net income (non-GAAP) (from above)   $ 25,953     $ 32,819     $ 30,302     $ 29,259     $ 26,870  
                           
      Average Assets   $ 9,015,439     $ 9,050,280     $ 8,968,653     $ 8,776,002     $ 8,550,855  
                           
      Adjusted return on average assets (annualized) (non-GAAP)     1.15 %     1.45 %     1.35 %     1.33 %     1.26 %
      Adjusted return on average equity (annualized) (non-GAAP)     10.20 %     13.19 %     12.60 %     12.69 %     11.90 %
                           
      NET INTEREST MARGIN (TEY) (3)                    
                           
      Net interest income (GAAP)   $ 59,986     $ 61,204     $ 59,722     $ 56,163     $ 54,699  
      Plus: Tax equivalent adjustment (4)     9,513       9,698       9,544       8,914       8,377  
      Net interest income – tax equivalent (Non-GAAP)   $ 69,499     $ 70,902     $ 69,266     $ 65,077     $ 63,076  
      Less: Acquisition accounting net accretion     184       471       463       268       363  
      Adjusted net interest income   $ 69,315     $ 70,431     $ 68,803     $ 64,809     $ 62,713  
                           
      Average earning assets   $ 8,241,035     $ 8,241,190     $ 8,183,196     $ 7,999,044     $ 7,807,720  
                           
      Net interest margin (GAAP)     2.95 %     2.95 %     2.90 %     2.82 %     2.82 %
      Net interest margin (TEY) (Non-GAAP)     3.42 %     3.43 %     3.37 %     3.27 %     3.25 %
      Adjusted net interest margin (TEY) (Non-GAAP)     3.41 %     3.40 %     3.34 %     3.26 %     3.24 %
                           
      EFFICIENCY RATIO (5)                    
                           
      Noninterest expense (GAAP)   $ 46,539     $ 53,499     $ 53,565     $ 49,888     $ 50,690  
                           
      Net interest income (GAAP)   $ 59,986     $ 61,204     $ 59,722     $ 56,163     $ 54,699  
      Noninterest income (GAAP)     16,892       30,625       27,157       30,889       26,858  
      Total income   $ 76,878     $ 91,829     $ 86,879     $ 87,052     $ 81,557  
                           
      Efficiency ratio (noninterest expense/total income) (Non-GAAP)     60.54 %     58.26 %     61.65 %     57.31 %     62.15 %
      Adjusted efficiency ratio (core noninterest expense/core total income) (Non-GAAP)     60.38 %     56.25 %     58.45 %     57.19 %     62.01 %
                           
    (1 ) Adjusted net income, adjusted earnings per common share, adjusted return on average assets and average equity are non-GAAP financial measures. The Company’s management believes that these measurements are important to investors as they exclude non-core or non-recurring income and expense items, therefore, they provide a more realistic run-rate for future periods. In compliance with applicable rules of the SEC, these non-GAAP measures are reconciled to net income, which is the most directly comparable GAAP financial measure.
    (2 ) Non-core or non-recurring items (post-tax) are calculated using an estimated effective federal tax rate of 21% with the exception of goodwill impairment which is not deductible for tax.
    (3 ) Interest earned and yields on nontaxable securities and loans are determined on a tax equivalent basis using a 21% effective federal tax rate.        
    (4 ) Net interest margin (TEY) is a non-GAAP financial measure. The Company’s management utilizes this measurement to take into account the tax benefit associated with certain loans and securities. It is also standard industry practice to measure net interest margin using tax-equivalent measures. In compliance with applicable rules of the SEC, this non-GAAP measure is reconciled to net interest income, which is the most directly comparable GAAP financial measure. In addition, the Company calculates net interest margin without the impact of acquisition accounting net accretion as this can fluctuate and it’s difficult to provide a more realistic run-rate for future periods.
    (5 ) Efficiency ratio is a non-GAAP measure. The Company’s management utilizes this ratio to compare to industry peers. The ratio is used to calculate overhead as a percentage of revenue. In compliance with the applicable rules of the SEC, this non-GAAP measure is reconciled to noninterest expense, net interest income and noninterest income, which are the most directly comparable GAAP financial measures.

    The MIL Network